Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Rear Seats ............................................... 1-7Safety Belts .............................................. 1-8Child Restraints ....................................... 1-27Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ......... 1-47Restraint System Check ............................ 1-56

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-2Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-7Windows ................................................. 2-11Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-13Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-16Mirrors .................................................... 2-35Storage Areas ......................................... 2-37Sunroof .................................................. 2-42

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-2Climate Controls ...................................... 3-19Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 3-25Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-41

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-30

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-4Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10All-Wheel Drive ........................................ 5-51Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-52Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-60Tires ...................................................... 5-61Appearance Care ..................................... 5-89Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-97Electrical System ...................................... 5-97Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-101Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 5-103

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10

Index .................................................................1

2004 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,the PONTIAC Emblem are registered trademarksand the name VIBE is a trademark of General MotorsCorporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. We reserve the right to make changesafter that time without further notice. For vehicles firstsold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors ofCanada Limited” for Pontiac Division whenever itappears in this manual.

Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will bethere if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If yousell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so thenew owner can use it.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 04VIBE A First Edition

©Copyright General Motors Corporation 05/05/03All Rights Reserved

Canadian OwnersYou can obtain a French copy of this manual from yourdealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read their owner’s manual from beginningto end when they first receive their new vehicle. Ifyou do this, it will help you learn about the features andcontrols for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll findthat pictures and words work together to explain things.

IndexA good place to look for what you need is the Index inback of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’sin the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.

ii

Safety Warnings and SymbolsYou will find a number of safety cautions in this book.We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you aboutthings that could hurt you if you were to ignore thewarning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce thehazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, youor others could be hurt.

You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Don’t,”“Don’t do this” or “Don’t letthis happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this book you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

A notice will tell you about something that can damageyour vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But thenotice will tell you what to do to help avoid thedamage.

When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTIONand NOTICE warnings in different colors or in differentwords.

You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They usethe same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsYour vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,are shown along with the text describing the operationor information relating to a specific component, control,message, gage or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage or indicator, reference the followingtopics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

iv

These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:

v

✍ NOTES

vi

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Manual Seats ................................................1-2Driver Seat Height Adjuster ..............................1-3Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-3Head Restraints .............................................1-5Passenger Folding Seatback ............................1-5

Rear Seats .......................................................1-7Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-7

Safety Belts .....................................................1-8Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-8Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-13How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14Driver Position ..............................................1-14Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-21Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-22Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-22Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-26Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-26

Child Restraints .............................................1-27Older Children ..............................................1-27Infants and Young Children ............................1-29Child Restraint Systems .................................1-33

Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-36Top Strap ....................................................1-36Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-38Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers

for Children (LATCH System) ......................1-39Securing a Child Restraint Designed

for the LATCH System ...............................1-41Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ....................................1-42Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ............................1-44Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..............1-47

Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-50When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-52What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-53How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-53What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? .......1-54Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-56

Restraint System Check ..................................1-56Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-56Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ............................................1-57

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-1

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis moving. The sudden movement could startleand confuse you, or make you push a pedalwhen you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’sseat only when the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front seat to unlock it.Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.Try to move the seat with your body, to make surethe seat is locked into place.

Don’t put anything under the front seats. Items underthe seats could keep the seats from locking intoplace properly.

1-2

Driver Seat Height Adjuster

Turn the knob located onthe outboard side of thedriver’s seat cushionto adjust the height of thedriver’s seat.

It is easier to use the adjuster when the seat isunoccupied. Make sure the ignition is off and the vehicleis in PARK (P) before adjusting the seat.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on theoutboard side of the seat. Release the lever to lock theseatback where you want it. Push on the seat tomake sure it’s locked into position. Pull up on the leverwithout pushing on the seatback, and the seat willgo to its original upright position.

1-3

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Even if youbuckle up, your safety belts can’t do their jobwhen you’re reclined like this.

The shoulder belt can’t do its job because itwon’t be against your body. Instead, it will bein front of you. In a crash you could go into it,receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sitwell back in the seat and wear your safety beltproperly.

1-4

Head Restraints

Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraintis closest to the top of your head. This positionreduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

Press the release button near the base of the restraintto lower and raise the restraint to a comfortableposition.

Passenger Folding Seatback

{CAUTION:

If you fold the seatback forward to carry longerobjects, such as skis, be sure any such cargois not near an air bag. In a crash, an inflatingair bag might force that object toward aperson. This could cause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away from the area inwhich an air bag would inflate. For moreinformation, see “Where Are the Air Bags?”and “Loading Your Vehicle,” in the Index.

You can also fold the front passenger’s seatback downto allow for more cargo space or as a temporarytable while the vehicle is stopped.

1-5

To fold the seatback down, do the following:

1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position andmake sure the seatback is at the most uprightposition and locked.

2. Pull up on one of thelevers located on eitherside of the back ofthe passenger’sseatback.

3. Fold the seatback down.

To raise the seatback, do the following:

1. Pull the seatback up and push it back to lock it intoplace. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted orcaught in the seatback.

2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure itis locked into position.

3. Use the reclining front seatback lever to adjust theseatback to a comfortable position.

1-6

Rear Seats

Rear Seat OperationYou can fold either side of the seatback down for morecargo space. The rear right side seatback can alsobe used as a temporary table while the vehicle isstopped. Make sure the front seatback isn’t reclined orin the rearward most position. If it is, the rear seatbackwon’t fold down all the way.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspress rearward on the seatback to be sure it islocked.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted won’t provide theprotection needed in a crash. The personwearing the belt could be seriously injured.After raising the rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety belts are properlyrouted and attached, and are not twisted.

1-7

To fold either seatback down, do the following:1. Pull up on the lock

release knob, locatedon the top of theseatbacks.

2. Fold the seatback down. Each seatback can befolded separately.

To raise the seatback, do the following:

1. Pull the seatback up and push it back to lock it intoplace. Make sure the safety belts are not twisted orcaught in the seatback.

2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure itis locked into position.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’twear a safety belt properly. If you are in acrash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts arefastened properly too.

1-8

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed. Do notallow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up. SeeSafety Belt ReminderLight on page 3-28.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawsays to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have acrash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.But most crashes are in between. In many of them,people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walkaway. Without belts they could have been badly hurtor killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

1-9

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat onwheels.

Put someone on it.

1-10

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoesn’t stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-11

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s whysafety belts make such good sense.

1-12

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be – whether you’re wearing a safetybelt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you’re upside down. And your chanceof being conscious during and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater ifyou are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be inmost of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts – not instead of them. Every air bagsystem ever offered for sale has required theuse of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle thathas air bags, you still have to buckle up to getthe most protection. That’s true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in anaccident – even one that isn’t your fault – you andyour passengers can be hurt. Being a gooddriver doesn’t protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-13

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and babies. If a child will beriding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-27or Infants and Young Children on page 1-29. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems yourvehicle has.

We’ll start with the driver position.

Driver PositionThis part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear itproperly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To seehow, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Don’t let it get twisted.

1-14

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-26.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

1-15

6. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snugon the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’dbe less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are best able totake belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop orcrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of theretractor.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltadjuster to the height that is right for you. Adjust theheight so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centeredon your shoulder. The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

To move it down, squeezethe button and move theheight adjuster to thedesired position. You canmove the adjuster up justby pushing up on theshoulder belt guide. Afteryou move the adjuster towhere you want it, try tomove it down withoutsqueezing the releasebutton to make sure it haslocked into position.

1-16

Q: What’s wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-17

Q: What’s wrong with this?

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at the pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

1-18

Q: What’s wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force tothe ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.

1-19

Q: What’s wrong with this?

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width ofthe belt to spread impact forces. If a belt istwisted, make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

1-20

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of theway. If you slam the door on it, you can damageboth the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-21

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s morelikely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safetybelt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-14.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the sameway as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all theway, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.If this happens, just let the belt go back all the wayand start again.

Rear Seat PassengersIt’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckleup! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in therear seat are hurt more often in crashes than thosewho are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can bethrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Passenger Positions

1-22

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here’show to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Don’t let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the buckle does not click, check to be surethat you are using the correct buckle. The bucklefor the center rear passenger position has the wordCENTER on it.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, itwill lock. If it does, let it go back all the wayand start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-26.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-23

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snugon the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the pelvic bones. And you’d be lesslikely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,the belt would apply force at your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are best able totake belt restraining forces.

1-24

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or acrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out ofthe retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-25

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. Althoughyou cannot see them, they are located on the retractorpart of the safety belts for the driver and right frontpassenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’sforward movement in a moderate to severe crash inwhich the front of the vehicle hits something.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably othernew parts for your safety belt system. See ReplacingRestraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-57.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, yourdealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. The extenderwill be just for you, and just for the seat in yourvehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wearit, just attach it to the regular safety belt.

1-26

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint ashoulder belt can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck. The lap beltshould fit snugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe or evenfatal internal injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-27

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.The belt can’t properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A beltmust be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,but the child is so small that the shoulder beltis very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,move the child toward the center of the vehicle.If the child is sitting in the center rear seatpassenger position, move the child toward thesafety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body would havethe restraint that the belts provide.

1-28

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the belt inthis way, in a crash the child might slide underthe belt. The belt’s force would then be appliedright on the child’s abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries.

The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snugon the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. Thisapplies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

1-29

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection provided by theappropriate restraint. Young children should not use thevehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their armswhile riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weighmuch — until a crash. During a crash a baby willbecome so heavy it is not possible to hold it.For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenlybecome a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’sarms. A baby should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

1-30

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,any air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer outstanding protection for adults andolder children, but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its air bag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight,height, and age but also whether or not therestraint will be compatible with the motor vehiclein which it will be used.

1-31

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck. Thisis necessary because a newborn infant’s neckis weak and its head weighs so muchcompared with the rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into therestraint, so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongest part of aninfant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infantsalways should be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, for whomthe safety belts are designed. A young child’ship bones are still so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may not remain low on thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settleup around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a body area that’sunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. Youngchildren always should be secured inappropriate child restraints.

1-32

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in amotor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designedto restrain or position a child on a continuous flatsurface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests towardthe center of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with theseating surface against the back of the infant. Theharness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

1-33

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint forthe child’s body with the harness and also sometimeswith surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Somebooster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, andsome high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.A booster seat can also help a child to see out thewindow.

1-34

Q: How do child restraints work?

A: A child restraint system is any device designed foruse in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or positionchildren. A built-in child restraint system is apermanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-onchild restraint system is a portable one, whichis purchased by the vehicle’s owner.

For many years, add-on child restraints have usedthe adult belt system in the vehicle. To helpreduce the chance of injury, the child also has to besecured within the restraint. The vehicle’s beltsystem secures the add-on child restraint in thevehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harnesssystem holds the child in place within the restraint.

One system, the three-point harness, has straps thatcome down over each of the infant’s shoulders andbuckle together at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and acrotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low against thechild’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the childrestraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, itwill have a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system inyour vehicle, but the child also has to be securedwithin the restraint to help reduce the chance of personalinjury. When securing an add-on child restraint, referto the instructions that come with the restraint which maybe on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, andto this manual. The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from the manufacturer.

1-35

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,therefore, recommend that child restraints be securedin a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facinginfant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing childseat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Neverput a rear-facing child restraint in the front passengerseat. Here’s why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s air bag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating air bag.Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in arear seat.

If you secure a forward-facing child restraintin the right front seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as it will go.It’s better to secure the child restraint ina rear seat.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle – even when no childis in it.

Top StrapSome child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” Itcan help restrain the child restraint during a collision.For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored tothe vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraintsare designed for use with or without the top strap beinganchored. Others require the top strap always to beanchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions foryour child restraint. If yours requires that the top strapbe anchored, do not use the restraint unless it isanchored properly.

If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one canbe obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kitis available.

1-36

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top strap, and that the strap beanchored. In the United States, some child restraintsalso have a top strap. If your child restraint has atop strap, it should be anchored.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor is designed to anchoronly one child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor to come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or others could beinjured if this happens. To help prevent injuryto people and damage to your vehicle, attachonly one child restraint per anchor.

Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchorpoints. Be sure to use an anchor point located on thesame side of the vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will be placed.

Raise the head restraint and route the top strap underit. See Head Restraints on page 1-5.

Once you have the top strap anchored, you will beready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the topstrap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions say.

1-37

Top Strap Anchor Location

Anchor the top strap to one of the top strap anchors.Your vehicle has top strap anchors for the rear seatingpositions. You will find three top strap anchors in acovered compartment on the floor of the rear cargo area.

To access the anchors,open the compartmentdoors marked withthe child restraint anchorsymbol.

1-38

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)

Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will findanchors (A) for both outside rear seat positions.

This system, designed to make installation of childrestraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and childrestraint attachments to secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure atop tether strap (C).

1-39

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, youneed a child restraint designed for that system.

To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this childrestraint system, each seating position with theLATCH system has a label on the seatback at eachlower anchor position. To assist you in locatingthe anchors for this child restraint system, place yourhand in a palm-up position and reach up betweenthe seat cushion and the seatback, just under the label.

1-40

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached toits anchorage points, the restraint won’t beable to protect the child correctly. In a crash,the child could be seriously injured or killed.Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint isproperly installed using the anchorage points,or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure therestraint. See “Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System” or “Securinga Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position” inthe Index for information on how to secure achild restraint in your vehicle.

Securing a Child Restraint Designedfor the LATCH System

1. Find the anchors for the seating position you wantto use, where the bottom of the seatback meets theback of the seat cushion.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to theanchors in the vehicle. The child restraintinstructions will show you how.

4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the topstrap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap onpage 1-36. Tighten the top strap according tothe child restraint instructions.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the topstrap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect theanchor points.

1-41

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat Position

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-39. See Top Strapon page 1-36 if the child restraint has one.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. If the buckle does not click, checkto be sure that you are using the correct buckle.The buckle for the center rear passenger positionhas the word CENTER on it.Make sure the release button is positioned so youwould be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.

1-42

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back intothe retractor while you push down on the childrestraint. If you’re using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee topush down on the child restraint as you tightenthe belt.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

1-43

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat Position

Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Neverput a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s air bag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating air bag.Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in arear seat.

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see LowerAnchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 1-39. See Top Strap on page 1-36 ifthe child restraint has one.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passengerair bag, always move the seat as far back as it willgo before securing a forward-facing child restraint.See Manual Seats on page 1-2.

2. Put the restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

1-44

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-45

6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back intothe retractor while you push down on the childrestraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee topush down on the child restraint as you tightenthe belt.

7. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

1-46

Supplemental Restraint System(SRS)This part explains the frontal and side impactSupplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) or air bagsystems.

Your vehicle has air bags – a frontal air bag for thedriver and another frontal air bag for the right frontpassenger. Your vehicle may also have side impact airbags – a side impact air bag for the driver andanother side impact air bag for the right front passenger.

If your vehicle has side impact air bags, it will saySRS-SIDE AIR BAG on a label on the side of the driver’sand right front passenger’s seat closest to the door.

Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do theirjob and comply with federal regulations.

1-47

Here are the most important things to know about theair bag systems:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crashif you aren’t wearing your safety belt – even ifyou have air bags. Wearing your safety beltduring a crash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle or beingejected from it. Air bags are designed to workwith safety belts but don’t replace them.

Frontal air bags for the driver and right frontpassenger are designed to deploy only inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all inrollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or inmany side crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal air bags may provide lessprotection in frontal crashes than more forcefulair bags have provided in the past.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

The side impact air bags for the driver andright front passenger are designed to inflateonly in moderate to severe crashes wheresomething hits the side of your vehicle. Theyaren’t designed to inflate in frontal, in rolloveror in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly – whether or not there’s an airbag for that person.

1-48

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact air bags inflatewith great force, faster than the blink of an eye.If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as youwould be if you were leaning forward, it couldseriously injure you. Safety belts help keepyouin position for air bag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safety belt,even with frontal air bags. The driver should sitas far back as possible while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle. Front occupants shouldnot lean on or sleep against the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

belts offer the best protection for adults, butnot for young children and infants. Neitherthevehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bagsystem is designed for them. Young childrenand infants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Always securechildren properly in your vehicle. To read how,see the part of this manual called “OlderChildren” or “Infants and Young Children.”

There is an air bagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the air bag symbol.

The system checks the air bag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-30for more information.

1-49

Where Are the Air Bags?

The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact air bag isin the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.

1-50

If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s sideimpact air bag is in the side of the passenger’sseatback closest to the door.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anair bag, the bag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person causingsevere injury or even death. The path of aninflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t putanything between an occupant and an air bag,and don’t attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Don’t let seat covers block theinflation path of a side impact air bag.

1-51

When Should an Air Bag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bagsare designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflateonly if the impact speed is above the system’sdesigned “threshold level.”

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags, which adjust the amount of restraint according tocrash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, theseair bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. Formore severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bagsare not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear impacts,or in many side impacts because inflation would not helpthe occupant.

The side impact air bags are designed to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bagwill inflate if the crash severity is above the system’sdesigned “threshold level.” The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags arenot designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would nothelp the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deployon the side of the vehicle that is struck.

It is possible that, in a crash involving the front of yourvehicle, only one of the two frontal air bags in yourvehicle will deploy. This is rare, but it can happen in acrash just severe enough to make a frontal air baginflate.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damageto a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angleof the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows downin frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impactair bags, inflation is determined by the locationand severity of the impact.

1-52

What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensingsystem detects that the vehicle is in a crash. Forboth frontal and side impact air bags, the sensingsystem triggers a release of gas from the inflator, whichinflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag andrelated hardware are all part of the air bag modules.Frontal air bag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with sideimpact air bags, the air bag modules are located in theseatback closest to the driver’s and/or right frontpassenger’s door.

How Does an Air Bag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protectionprovided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the

frontal air bags would not help you in many types ofcollisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, andmany side impacts, primarily because an occupant’smotion is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bagswould not help you in many types of collisions,including frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, andrear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward those air bags. Air bags should neverbe regarded as anything more than a supplement tosafety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal air bags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s side impact air bag.

1-53

What Will You See After an Air BagInflates?After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly thatsome people may not even realize the air bag inflated.Some components of the air bag module – the steeringwheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument panel forthe right front passenger’s bag, the side of the seatbackclosest to the door for the driver and right passenger’sside impact air bags – will be hot for a short time. Theparts of the bag that come into contact with you may bewarm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smokeand dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags.Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing orbeing able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an air bag inflates, there is dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone inthe vehicle should get out as soon as it is safeto do so. If you have breathing problems butcan’t get out of the vehicle after an air baginflates, then get fresh air by opening awindow or a door. If you experience breathingproblems following an air bag deployment, youshould seek medical attention.

1-54

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from theright front passenger air bag.

• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After anair bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts foryour air bag system. If you don’t get them, the airbag system won’t be there to help protect youin another crash. A new system will include air bagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with two electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. Additionally, your vehicle hastwo sensors which detect side impacts. Thesesensors signal the appropriate side air bag to inflate.Your vehicle is also equipped with a crash sensingand diagnostic module, which records informationabout the frontal air bag system. The modulerecords information about the readiness of thesystem, system status and the driver’s andpassenger’s safety belt usage at deployment.

• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bagsystems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system won’t work properly. See your dealer forservice.

Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’sor the right front passenger’s air bag, or the airbag covering on the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s seatback, the bag may not workproperly. You may have to replace the air bagmodule in the steering wheel, both the air bagmodule and the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s air bag, or both the air bag moduleand seatback for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open orbreak the air bag coverings.

If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water – such aswater up to the carpeting or higher – or if water entersyour vehicle and soaks the carpet, the air bagcontroller can be soaked and ruined. If this everhappens, and then you start your vehicle, the damagecould make the frontal and side impact air bagsinflate and safety belt pretensioners activate, even ifthere’s no crash. You would have to replace theair bags, all the sensors and related parts, parts of thesafety belt system and parts of the driver and rightfront passenger’s seatbacks. If your vehicle is ever in aflood, or if it’s exposed to water that soaks the carpet,you can avoid needless repair costs by turning offthe vehicle immediately and disconnecting the batterycables. Don’t let anyone start the vehicle under anycircumstances. See your dealer for service.

1-55

Servicing Your Air Bag-EquippedVehicleAir bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the air bag systems in several placesaround your vehicle. Your dealer and the servicemanual have information about servicing your vehicleand the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual,see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.

{CAUTION:

For up to two minutes after the ignition key isturned off and the battery is disconnected, anair bag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you are close toan air bag when it inflates. Avoid wireswrapped with yellow tape or yellowconnectors. They are probably part of the airbag systems. Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified to do so.

The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.

Restraint System Check

Checking Your Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look for any otherloose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a beltis torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The air bag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)

1-56

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems inyour vehicle. A damaged restraint system maynot properly protect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure your restraintsystems are working properly after a crash,have them inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCHsystem parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.But if the belts were stretched, as they would be ifworn during a more severe crash, then you neednew parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during a moresevere crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to have LATCHsystem, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltor LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time ofthe collision.

If the frontal air bags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and right front passengr’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the newretractor assembly will be there to help protect you in acollision.

If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bagsystem parts. See the part on the air bag system earlierin this section.

1-57

✍ NOTES

1-58

Keys ...............................................................2-2Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5

Doors and Locks .............................................2-7Door Locks ....................................................2-7Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-8Leaving Your Vehicle ......................................2-9Liftgate/Liftglass .............................................2-9

Windows ........................................................2-11Manual Windows ..........................................2-11Power Windows ............................................2-12Sun Visors ...................................................2-13

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-13Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-13

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-16New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-16Ignition Positions ..........................................2-16Starting Your Engine .....................................2-18Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-19Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-20Manual Transaxle Operation ...........................2-23Parking Brake ..............................................2-27

Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-28Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-30Parking Your Vehicle .....................................2-31Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-32Engine Exhaust ............................................2-33Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-34

Mirrors ...........................................................2-35Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-35Outside Remote Control Mirrors ......................2-36Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-36

Storage Areas ................................................2-37Glove Box ...................................................2-37Cupholder(s) ................................................2-37Coinholder(s) ................................................2-37Instrument Panel Storage Area .......................2-37Center Console Storage Area .........................2-37Floor Mats ...................................................2-37Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-38Rear Storage Area ........................................2-40Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ...............2-40Cargo Cover ................................................2-41

Sunroof .........................................................2-42

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignitionkey is dangerous for many reasons. A child orothers could be badly injured or even killed.

They could operate the power windows orother controls or even make the vehicle move.

Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-2

One key is used for theignition, the doors and allother locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removesthe key tag from the key and gives it to the first owner.

Each tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or aqualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep thetag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you’ll be able tohave a new one made easily using this code.

If you need a new key, contact your dealership to obtainthe correct key code. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-6 for more information.

Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features thatcan help prevent theft. You can have a lot of troublegetting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keysinside. You may even have to damage your vehicle toget in. So be sure you have spare keys.

2-3

Remote Keyless Entry SystemIf equipped, the keyless entry system operates on aradio frequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This isnormal for any remote keyless entry system. If thetransmitter does not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from yourvehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry System Operation onpage 2-5.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or aqualified technician for service.

2-4

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperationIf your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlockyour doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet(9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmittersupplied with your vehicle.

LOCK: Press this button tolock all of the doors.

The turn signal lights will flash once to confirm that thedoors have locked. The remote keyless entry systemwill not operate while the doors are open, the key is inthe ignition or if the liftglass or hatch are not completelyclosed and latched.

UNLOCK: Press this button once to unlock the driver’sdoor. The turn signal lights will flash twice and theinterior lamps will come on to confirm that the door hasunlocked. If the UNLOCK button is pressed againwithin three seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.The interior lamps will stay on for 15 seconds or until theignition is turned on. If the UNLOCK button is pressedand no door is opened, the doors will lock automaticallyafter 30 seconds.

HATCH: Press this button for a few seconds to openthe rear liftglass. If the ignition key is in the ON position,the liftglass cannot be opened by the HATCH buttonon the transmitter.

2-5

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe purchased through your dealer. Remember to bringany remaining transmitters with you when you go toyour dealer. When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmittersmust also be matched. Once your dealer has coded thenew transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlockyour vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remote keylessentry transmitter should last about three years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’twork at the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,it’s probably time to change the battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not totouch any of the circuitry. Static from your bodytransferred to these surfaces may damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery, do the following:

1. Insert a small coin or similar object to separate thebottom half from the top half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the battery and replace it with the newone. Make sure the positive side of the batteryfaces upward. For battery replacement, usea three-volt battery, type CR2032, or equivalent.

3. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sureno moisture can enter.

2-6

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers — especially children — can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door is locked, thehandle won’t open it. You increase thechance of being thrown out of the vehiclein a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So,wear safety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. A childcan be overcome by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Always lock your vehiclewhenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doors canhelp prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

From the outside, use your key or the remote keylessentry transmitter, if equipped. See Remote Keyless EntrySystem Operation on page 2-5 for more information.

To manually lock the door from the inside, press theknob on the door forward. To unlock the door, press theknob rearward. If you have manual locks, you mustuse the key to lock and unlock the liftgate.

2-7

If your vehicle has power door locks, open the driver’sdoor by turning the key in the lock toward the rear of thevehicle. Turning the key back toward the center, thentoward the rear again will unlock all of the doors. Usingthe key in the passenger’s door will also unlock all ofthe doors.

Lock a door by turning the key toward the front of thevehicle. If you have power door locks, all the doorswill lock.

Power Door Locks

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the power doorlock switch is locatedon the armrest on the door.

e (Power Door Lock) : Press the power door lockswitch on the driver’s or passenger’s door to lockor unlock all the doors at once.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle is equipped with rear door security locksthat help prevent passengers from opening the reardoors on your vehicle from the inside.

The security locks arelocated on the inside ofthe rear door trim.

To use these locks, do the following:

1. Slide the lever down.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.

The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened fromthe inside when this feature is in use.

2-8

To open a rear door with the security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door from the inside.

2. Then open the door from the outside.

If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults andolder children who ride in the rear won’t be able toopen the rear door from the inside. You should let adultsand older children know how these security lockswork, and how to cancel the locks.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:

1. Unlock the door from the inside and open thedoor from the outside.

2. Slide the lever up.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

The rear door locks will now work normally.

Leaving Your VehicleIf you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open yourdoor and set the locks from inside. Then get out andclose the door.

Liftgate/Liftglass

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate orliftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t seeor smell CO. It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. If you must drive with theliftgate open or if electrical wiring or othercable connections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate or liftglass:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and select thecontrol setting that will force outside airinto your vehicle. See “Climate ControlSystem” in the Index.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

2-9

Liftgate/Liftglass ReleaseTo open the liftgate using your key insert the key intothe keyhole and turn the key counterclockwise.Raise the liftgate by hand.

When closing the liftgate, you can use the handle to pullit down.

To lock the liftgate, turn the key clockwise to the firstposition.

To open the liftglass using your key insert the key intothe keyhole and turn the key clockwise to the secondposition.

Use the handle in the center of the liftglass to help inlifting the glass.

You can also release theliftglass by pressing therelease button (if equipped)located on the instrumentpanel to the left of thesteering wheel.

2-10

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the windowsclosed is dangerous. A child can be overcomeby the extreme heat and can suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke. Neverleave a child alone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm or hot weather.

Manual WindowsUse the window crank to open and close each window.

2-11

Power Windows

If your vehicle has thisoption, the switchescontrolling the driver’sand passenger’s windowsare located on thedriver’s door.

The power window switch on each passenger doorcontrols that window only. These switches work whilethe ignition is on.

For the front windows, press the front of a switch tolower a window and lift the front of the switch to raise awindow. For the rear windows, the power windowlever is located on each door below the arm rest.

AUTO (Express-Down): Press this switch all the waydown and release it to lower the driver’s windowquickly.

Lock-Out: Press thewindow lock-out button,located next to the driver’spower door lock switch, todisable the passenger’spower window switches.Press the button again toenable the windowswitches.

The driver can still control the left front passengerwindow with the lock-out button pressed.

2-12

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down the visors. Youcan also swing them to the side.

The visors can also be extended for more coverage.Swing the visor down and to the side and then slide thevisor out to extend it. Do not extend the visor when itis in the forward position, only when it is at the sideof the vehicle.

Visor Vanity MirrorSwing down the driver’s sun visor and lift the cover toexpose the vanity mirror. The passenger side ofthe vehicle also has a vanity mirror. Swing down thevisor to expose the mirror.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make itimpossible to steal. However, there are ways youcan help.

Content Theft-DeterrentIf your vehicle has this feature, the theft-deterrentsystem is designed to activate an alarm if any of theside doors or the liftgate is forcibly unlocked or ifthe battery terminal is disconnected and thenreconnected while the system is set.

The alarm will sound the horn intermittently and flashthe headlamps, turn signal lamps and interior lights.If the driver’s or front passenger’s side doors areunlocked forcibly, the other side doors and the liftgatewill be locked automatically.

2-13

Arming the SystemTo arm the system, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position andremove it.

2. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle.

3. Close and lock all the side doors and liftgate withthe key or remote keyless entry transmitter.

The indicator light locatedon the instrument panel tothe left of the steeringwheel will come on whenall the side doors andliftgate are closedand locked.

The system will be automatically set after 30 seconds.When the system is set, the indicator light will startflashing.

4. After the indicator light starts flashing, you mayleave the vehicle.Do not leave anyone in the vehicle when you setthe system, because unlocking the vehicle from theinside will activate the system.

Testing the AlarmTo test the alarm, do the following:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described in the previousprocedure. The side doors and liftgate shouldbe locked with the key or remote keyless entrytransmitter. Be sure to wait until the indicator lightstarts flashing.

3. Unlock the driver’s door from the inside. Thesystem should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described in the disarmingprocedure.

5. Repeat this operation for the other doors. Alsocheck that the system is activated when thebattery terminal is disconnected and thenreconnected.If the system does not work properly, have itchecked by your dealer.

2-14

How the System Alarm is ActivatedThe system will activate the alarm under the followingconditions:

• If the driver’s or front passenger’s door is unlockedor if any of the other side doors or the liftgate isforcibly opened without the key or remote keylessentry transmitter.

• If the battery terminal is disconnected and thenreconnected.

• If the ignition is hot-wired.

• If the side window glass is broken or damaged.

The indicator light will come on when the systemis activated.

If the driver’s or front passenger’s side doors areunlocked without using the key or remote keyless entrytransmitter, the other side doors and the liftgate willbe automatically locked again.

After one minute the alarm will automatically stop andthe indicator light will start flashing again.

Reactivating the SystemOnce the system is set, it will automatically reset thealarm after the alarm stops. The alarm will activate againunder the same conditions as described earlier.

Disarming the SystemThe alarm can be disarmed by doing one of thefollowing:

• Turn the ignition key from LOCK to ON.

• Unlock any of the side doors with the key or withthe remote keyless entry transmitter.If the liftgate or liftglass is opened with the key, thesystem will still be activated.

2-15

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:

• Don’t drive at any one speed — fast orslow — for the first 500 miles (805 km).Don’t make full-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your newbrake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wear andearlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brake linings.

• Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towinga Trailer” in the Index for more information.

Ignition PositionsWith the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to fourdifferent positions.

Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and youcan’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; ifso, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steeringwheel left and right while you turn the key hard.Turn the key only with your hand. Using a toolto force it could break the key or the ignition switch.If none of these works, then your vehicle needsservice.

2-16

(A) LOCK: This is the only position from which you canremove the key. This locks your steering wheel,ignition and automatic transaxle. Push in the ignitionswitch as you turn the key toward you.

If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignition switchcan’t be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever is inPARK (P).

{CAUTION:

On manual transaxle vehicles, turning the keyto LOCK and removing it will lock the steeringcolumn and result in a loss of ability to steerthe vehicle. This could cause a collision. If youneed to turn the engine off while the vehicle ismoving, turn the key only to ACC. Don’t pushthe key in while the vehicle is moving.

(B) ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates someof your electrical accessories (such as the radio, butnot the ventilation fan). It unlocks the steering wheel andignition. To move the key from ACC to LOCK, push inthe key and then turn it to LOCK.

(C) ON: This is the position the switch returns to afteryou start your engine and release the switch. The switchstays in the ON position when the engine is running.But even when the ignition is not running, you can useON to operate your electrical accessories (includingthe ventilation fan and 115 volt power outlet) andto display some warning and indicator lights.

(D) START: This position starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON for normal driving.

When the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow youto operate some of your electrical accessories.

A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s doorwhen the ignition is still in ACC or LOCK and thekey is in the ignition.

2-17

Starting Your Engine

Automatic TransaxleMove your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine won’t start in any other position – that’s asafety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage thetransaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when yourvehicle is stopped.

Manual TransaxleThe shift lever should be in neutral and the parkingbrake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor andstart the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutchpedal is not all the way down – that’s a safety feature.

Starting Your Engine1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your

ignition key to START. When the engine starts, letgo of the key. The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause your battery tobe drained much sooner. And the excessive heat

can damage your starter motor. Wait about 15seconds between each try to help avoid drainingyour battery or damaging your starter.

2. If it doesn’t start, wait about 15 seconds and tryagain to start the engine by turning the ignitionkey to START. Wait about 15 seconds betweeneach try.When your engine has run about 10 seconds towarm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Don’t“race” your engine when it’s cold.If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), letthe engine run for a few minutes to warm up.

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but thenstops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and holding it there as you hold the key inSTART for about three seconds. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, do the same thing, butthis time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer. If you don’t, your enginemight not perform properly.

2-18

Engine Coolant HeaterIn very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the enginecoolant heater, if equipped, can help. You’ll geteasier starting and better fuel economy during enginewarm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be pluggedin a minimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of thecoolant heater is not required.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cordlocated on the driver’s side of the enginecompartment, near the front.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could bedamaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof trying to list everything here, we ask that you contactyour dealer in the area where you’ll be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for thatparticular area.

2-19

Automatic Transaxle Operation

There are severaldifferent positions foryour shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’s thebest position to use when you start your enginebecause your vehicle can’t move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle won’t move, evenwhen you’re on fairly level ground, always setyour parking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)” in theIndex. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing aTrailer” in the Index.

2-20

Ensure that the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatictransaxle shift lock control system. You have to fullyapply your regular brakes before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannotshift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shiftlever, push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) andrelease the shift lever button as you maintain brakeapplication. Then press the shift lever button and movethe shift lever into the gear you wish. See ShiftingOut of Park (P) on page 2-30.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicleis moving forward could damage your transaxle.Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see IfYou Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow onpage 4-28.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’tconnect with the wheels. To restart when you’re alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is“racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous.Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal,your vehicle could move very rapidly. Youcould lose control and hit people or objects.Don’t shift into a drive gear while your engineis racing.

Notice: Damage to your transaxle caused byshifting into a drive gear with the engine racing isn’tcovered by your warranty.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If youneed more power for passing, and you’re:

• Going less than about 27 mph (43 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 29 mph (47 km/h) or more, push youraccelerator pedal all the way down.You’ll shift down to the next gear and have morepower.

2-21

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power thanDRIVE (D) but lower fuel economy. You can useSECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed asyou go down steep mountain roads, but then youwould also want to use your brakes off and on.

LOW (L): This position gives you even more powerthan SECOND (2) but lower fuel economy. You can useit on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If theshift lever is put in LOW (L), the transaxle won’t shift intolow gear until the vehicle is going slow enough.

Notice: If your front wheels won’t turn, don’t try todrive. This might happen if you were stuck invery deep sand or mud or were up against a solidobject. You could damage your transaxle. Also,if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold yourvehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. Thiscould overheat and damage the transaxle. Use yourbrakes to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.

Overdrive Off

Your automatic transaxlehas an O/D (overdrive off)button. It is located onthe left side of theshift lever.

Press the O/D button to turn off overdrive. A light on theinstrument panel cluster will come on when thisfeature is used. Press the button again to turn overdriveback on. Then the light on the instrument panelcluster will go off. See Overdrive Off Light on page 3-39.

Use this feature for better fuel economy. Fast startsuse the most fuel while gradual starts give you the bestfuel economy.

When you turn on your vehicle the overdrive willautomatically be on until you turn it off.

2-22

Manual Transaxle Operation

Five-Speed

First (1): Press the clutchpedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then, slowly letup on the clutch pedalas you press theaccelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going lessthan 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a completestop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put theshift lever in neutral and let up on the clutch. Press theclutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up onthe accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5): Shift intoTHIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same wayyou do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press thebrake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift toneutral.

Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle yourengine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down on the clutchpedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on theclutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.

Notice: Shift into REVERSE (R) only after yourvehicle is stopped. Shifting into REVERSE (R) whileyour vehicle is moving could damage yourtransaxle. The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty.

Also, use REVERSE (R) along with the parking brakefor parking your vehicle.

Five-Speed TransaxleShift Pattern

2-23

Six-Speed

FIRST (1): Press the clutchpedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then, slowly letup on the clutch pedalas you press theaccelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going lessthan 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a completestop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put theshift lever in neutral and let up on the clutch. Press theclutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up onthe accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal. If you’ve come to a complete stopand it’s hard to shift into SECOND (2), put the shift leverin neutral and let up on the clutch. Press the clutchpedal back down. Then shift into SECOND (2).

Six-Speed TransaxleShift Pattern

2-24

THIRD (3): Press the clutch pedal and upshift intoTHIRD (3). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal asyou press the accelerator pedal.

FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5), SIXTH (6): Shift intoFOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) the sameway you do for THIRD (3). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press thebrake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift toneutral.

Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle yourengine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down on the clutchpedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on theclutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.

Notice: Shift into REVERSE (R) only after yourvehicle is stopped. Shifting into REVERSE (R) whileyour vehicle is moving could damage yourtransaxle. The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty.

Also, use REVERSE (R) along with the parking brakefor parking your vehicle. There is an audible beep whenthe vehicle is in REVERSE (R) to ensure that FIRST (1)gear and REVERSE (R) are not confused.

2-25

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift, youcould lose control of your vehicle. You couldinjure yourself or others. Don’t shift downmore than one gear at a time when youdownshift.

This chart shows when to shift to the next gear for thebest fuel economy.

Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds

Engine 1 to 2 or2 to 1

2 to 3 or3 to 2

3 to 4 or4 to 3

4 to 5 or5 to 4

5 to 6 or6 to 5

1.8 L(Code 8)

15 mph(24 km/h)

25 mph(40 km/h)

40 mph64 km/h)

45 mph(72 mph) —

1.8 L (Code L) 15 mph(24 km/h)

25 mph(40 km/h)

40 mph(64 km/h)

45 mph(72 km/h)

50 mph(80 km/h)

If your speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), or if the engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to thenext lower gear. You may have to downshift two or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for goodperformance.

2-26

Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal downand pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition ison, the brake system warning light will come on.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can pressthe release button. Hold the release button in as youmove the lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on cancause your rear brakes to overheat. You may haveto replace them, and you could also damageother parts of your vehicle.

If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-34.

2-27

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’tmove, even when you’re on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling atrailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

If you have an automatic transaxle do the following:

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot andset the parking brake by pulling up on the parkingbrake lever.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) as follows:

3. Hold in the button onthe shift lever.

• Push the lever all the way toward the front of thevehicle.

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave your vehicle with the key in your hand, yourvehicle is in PARK (P).

2-28

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle withthe engine running. Your vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.And, if you leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured. Don’t leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your automatic transaxle vehiclewith the engine running, be sure your vehicle is inPARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, seeif you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it meansthat the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

2-29

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift yourautomatic transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too much force on the parkingpawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake andthen shift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park(P) on page 2-28.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofPARK (P)before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anothervehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of thepressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so youcan pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle it has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system. You haveto fully apply your regular brakes before you canshift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in ON. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-20.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on theshift lever – push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)and release the shift lever button as you maintain brakeapplication. Then press the shift lever button and movethe shift lever into the gear you wish.

2-30

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shiftout of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the ignition to LOCK. Make sure the parkingbrake is applied.

2. Carefully pry theshift-lock overridesmall, round cover fromthe floor-shift console,located to the rightof the shift lever.

3. Insert the end of a flat-tipped tool into the circularslot and press down firmly.

4. While maintaining brake application, move the shiftlever into the drive gear you want.

5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.

Parking Your VehicleBefore you get out of your vehicle, move the shift leverinto REVERSE (R), and firmly apply the parkingbrake. Once the shift lever has been placed intoREVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal pressed in, you canturn the ignition key to OFF, remove the key andrelease the clutch.

If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-34.

2-31

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t parkover papers, leaves, dry grass or other thingsthat can burn.

2-32

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see orsmell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange or

different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or over roaddebris.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

• Repairs weren’t done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-33

Running Your Engine While YouAre ParkedIt’s better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle. See the earlier Caution under“Engine Exhaust.”

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe climate control fan is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage.Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.NEVER park in a garage with the enginerunning.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See “Winter Driving” in the Index.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you’ve left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle won’t move, evenwhen you’re on fairly level ground, always setyour parking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’tmove. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.

If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a trailer,also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-34.

2-34

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorThe inside rearview mirror is attached to your vehicle’sfront windshield glass. If you do not have a sunroof,your vehicle’s inside rearview mirror may be equippedwith reading lamps. If your vehicle is equipped withthis mirror, there are two buttons located on the bottomof the mirror. Press the buttons to turn the lamps onand press them again to turn the lamps off.

To prevent the battery from draining, the lamps willautomatically turn off when the key is in the ACCor LOCK positions or if the key is removed for 20minutes or more. The lights will come on when any ofthe doors are opened or if the key is turned to theON position.

The mirror moves so that you can adjust it up and downor side to side. You can adjust the mirror for day ornight driving. Pull the tab for night driving to reduceglare. Push the tab for daytime driving.

2-35

Outside Remote Control Mirrors

These controls are locatedto the left of your steeringwheel on the instrumentpanel.

To adjust either mirror, push the button labeled L (left)or R (right). Then use the arrows on the control padto adjust the mirror.

Once you have adjusted both mirrors, move the selectorswitch back to the center. This prevents moving themirrors accidentally once you have adjusted them.

Outside Convex MirrorYour passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from thedriver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulderbefore changing lanes.

2-36

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box door, lift the latch. Always keepthe glove box door closed while driving.

Cupholder(s)There are two fixed cupholders located in the consolearea between the two front seats. There are alsotwo cupholders that fold out of the rear of the consolestorage unit.

Coinholder(s)Your instrument panel has a coinholder located to theleft of the steering wheel.

Instrument Panel Storage AreaThere are storage compartments located on theinstrument panel in two places. They are below theinterior/instrument panel brightness dial and below theshift lever. Pull the top of the door toward you to open itor for the compartment below the shift lever, push thebutton to open it.

Center Console Storage AreaA storage area is located in the console between theseats which can hold CDs, cassettes or a cell phone.There is also an accessory power outlet located inthe storage area.

To access the upper tray of the storage area, raise theconsole box lid without touching the lock releaselever. To access the lower storage area, pull up the lockrelease lever while raising the lid.

Floor MatsYour vehicle’s floor mat is specially designed to remainin position under your feet and out of reach of theaccelerator pedal. The driver’s side floor mat is held inplace by two locator hooks.

Be sure the driver’s side floor mat is properly placed onthe floor so that it does not block the movement ofthe accelerator pedal.

2-37

How to Remove and Replacethe Floor Mat

To remove the floor mat,pull up on the rear of themat to disconnect itfrom the locator hooks.

To reinstall the floor mat, line up the openings in thefloor mat over the locator hooks and push downinto place.

Luggage Carrier

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top of yourvehicle that is longer or wider than the luggagecarrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattressand so forth — the wind can catch it as youdrive along. This can cause you to losecontrol. What you are carrying could beviolently torn off, and this could cause you orother drivers to have a collision, and of coursedamage your vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, never carrysomething longer or wider than the luggagecarrier on top of your vehicle.

The luggage carrier has sliding crossrails and side railsthat are attached to the roof to secure cargo.

Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with yourluggage carrier for transporting sports equipment.These are available through your GM dealer.

2-38

To adjust the position of the crossrails, do the following:

1. Turn the eight knobs counterclockwise to loosenthe crossrails.

2. Slide the crossrails to the desired position forloading the luggage.

3. After adjusting the crossrails, be sure to tighten allthe knobs by turning the knobs clockwise.

Notice: Loading cargo that weighs more than75 lbs. (34 kg) on the luggage carrier may damageyour vehicle. When you carry large things, never letthem hang over the rear or the sides of yourvehicle. When loading cargo, be sure it rests on thecrossrails and does not scratch or damage thevehicle.

Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten itsecurely to the luggage carrier. Put the main weightas far forward as you can and move the rearcrossrail as far forward as possible to keep the loadfrom shifting.

Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity whenloading your vehicle. For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-32.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,check now and then to make sure the luggagecarrier and cargo are still securely fastened.

2-39

Rear Storage AreaA storage area is located under the rear cargo areafloor panel.

Turn the two lock knobs onthe floor panel to unlockthe storage areaaccess cover.

Be sure to lock the access cover to close it securely.

Rear Cargo Accessory TrackSystemYour vehicle has a track system located on the floor ofthe rear cargo area. This system can be used tocarry accessories in your vehicle in many ways by usingthe tie-down anchors provided in your vehicle oraccessory packages available from your dealer.

Make sure the cargo being carried in the rear cargoarea is secure. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

2-40

Cargo CoverTo use the cargo cover, attach the side hooks of thecargo cover to the upper tie down hooks located alongboth sides of the rear cargo area.

{CAUTION:

An improperly stored cargo cover could bethrown about the vehicle during a collision orsudden maneuver. You or others could beinjured. If you remove the cover, always storeit in the proper storage location. When you putit back, always be sure that it is securelyreattached.

Cargo Tie Downs

The tire tie-down belts are designed to secure the flattire. You can also use the belts and hooks to secureyour luggage.

There are eight tie-down hooks located in the rear ofthe vehicle. The belts are located under the cargo areafloor panel. To use the belts, hook the ends to thelower tie-down hooks in a criss-cross pattern across thecargo. Pull on the belts at the buckle to tighten thebelt as needed.

2-41

Sunroof

If your vehicle has a sunroof, you can tilt or open it. Totilt the sunroof, slide the sunshade rearward, thenpress the switch marked UP. Press the other end of theswitch to lower the sunroof. Your ignition must be onfor the switch to work.

To open the sunroof, press the SLIDE arrow that pointsto the rear of the vehicle. To close it, press the otherarrow that points to the front of the vehicle. The sunroofwill close partially and stop. Once the sunroof stopsyou will have to release the switch and press the buttonagain to completely close it. You can open the sunroofto any position. The sunshade will open when thesunroof is opened.

2-42

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-2Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-4Other Warning Devices ...................................3-4Horn .............................................................3-5Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-5Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-5Exterior Lamps .............................................3-12Interior Lamps ..............................................3-14Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-17Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........3-18Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-19

Climate Controls ............................................3-19Climate Control System .................................3-19Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-22Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-23

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-25Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-26Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-27Tachometer .................................................3-28Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-28Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-30Charging System Light ..................................3-31

Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-31Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-32Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-33Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-34Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-38Cruise Control Light ......................................3-39Overdrive Off Light ........................................3-39Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .....................3-39Door Ajar Light .............................................3-39Fuel Gage ...................................................3-40

Audio System(s) .............................................3-41Setting the Time ...........................................3-41Radio with CD ..............................................3-42Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-52Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-63Understanding Radio Reception ......................3-63Care of Your CDs .........................................3-64Care of Your CD Player ................................3-64Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-64XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System

(United States Only) ..................................3-64

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Instrument Panel Overview

3-2

The main components of your instrument panel are thefollowing:A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-22.B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel

Cluster on page 3-26.C. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 3-4.D. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-41.E. Rear Window Defogger Button. See “Rear Window

Defogger” under Climate Control System onpage 3-19.

F. Front Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light. SeeSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-28.

G. Climate Control System. See Climate ControlSystem on page 3-19.

H. Power Remote Control Mirror Button. See OutsideRemote Control Mirrors on page 2-36.

I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See“Instrument Panel Brightness” under Interior Lampson page 3-14.

J. Rear Liftglass Release Button. See Liftgate/Liftglasson page 2-9.

K. Coinholder. See Coinholder(s) on page 2-37.L. Content Theft-Deterrent Security Light. See Content

Theft-Deterrent on page 2-13.

M. Storage Compartment. See Instrument PanelStorage Area on page 2-37.

N. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.

O. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-10.P. Tilt Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-5.Q. Horn. See Horn on page 3-5.R. Cruise Control Lever (Option). See “Cruise Control”

under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.S. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-16.T. Windshield Wiper Lever. See “Windshield Wipers”

under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.U. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

on page 3-19.V. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.W. Power Outlet. See Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating

Current on page 3-18.X. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27.Y. Center Console Storage Area. See Center Console

Storage Area on page 2-37.Z. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-37.

3-3

Hazard Warning Flashers

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your frontand rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

Your hazard warningbutton is located on thecenter of the instrumentpanel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. Press the button again toturn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turnsignals won’t work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind yourvehicle.

3-4

HornTo sound the horn, press anywhere on the horn pad onyour steering wheel.

Tilt WheelA tilt steering column allows you to adjust the steeringcolumn before you drive. You can also raise it tothe highest level to give your legs more room when youexit and enter the vehicle.

The tilt lever is locatedunderneath the steeringwheel column.

To tilt the column, move the lever downward. Adjust thesteering wheel to a comfortable position, then movethe lever upward to lock the column in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The turn signal/multifunction lever is located on the leftside of the steering column.

This lever operates the following:

• Turn and Lane-Change Signals

• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

• Flash-to-Pass

For more information on the exterior lamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 3-12.

3-5

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has an upward (for right) and adownward (for left) position. These positions allow youto signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.When the turn is finished, the lever will returnautomatically.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever untilthe arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you completeyour lane change. The lever will return by itself whenyou release it.

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

If you signal a turn or a lane change and notice thearrow flashing rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned outand other drivers won’t see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, have it replaced to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when yousignal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then checkthe fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-98.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerThe headlamps must be on for this feature to work.For high beams, push the turn signal lever awayfrom you.

When the high beams areon, this light on theinstrument panel clusteralso will be on.

It will go off when you switch to the low beams.To switch back to low beams, pull the levertoward you.

Flash-to-PassWith the lever in the low-beam position, pull the levertoward you to momentarily switch to high beams(to signal that you are going to pass). If you have theheadlamps on when you release the lever, they willreturn to the low beams.

3-6

Windshield Wipers

The lever on the right side of the steering columncontrols the windshield wipers and washer.

The available positions are the following:

OFF: The wipers are off.

INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to INT to choose adelayed wiping cycle. In light rain or snow, you mightwant to use this position rather than continuous wiping.You can change the time between wipes by turningthe INT TIME band. Turn the band forward or rearwardfor longer or shorter delay interval.

LO (Low): Move the lever to LO for steady wiping atlow speed.

HI (High): Move the lever to HI for steady wiping athigh speed.

MIST: For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST.Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. Thewipers will stop after one wipe.

REAR: To turn on the rear window wiper, twist the endof the lever upward. The wiper does not work withthe rear liftglass open.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper bladesbefore using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do becomedamaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuitbreaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear awaysnow or ice to prevent an overload.

3-7

Windshield WasherPull the lever toward you to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The spray will continue until you release thelever. The wipers will run a few times. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-39.

To squirt washer fluid on the rear window, twist the knobupward and downward as far as it will go. The knobautomatically returns from these positions after yourelease it. You can twist the lever downward to create alarge flow of water on the rear window, then twist thelever back up to wipe the window. This feature is helpfulto quickly clear the rear liftglass when very dirty.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, don’t use your washeruntil the windshield is warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

Cruise Control

The cruise control lever is located on the right side ofthe steering wheel.

3-8

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot onthe accelerator. This can really help on long trips.Cruise control does not work at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

• Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou can’t drive safely at a steady speed.So, don’t use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

• Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeneedless wheel spinning, and you couldlose control. Don’t use cruise control onslippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when you’renot using cruise, you might hit a button and gointo cruise when you don’t want to. You couldbe startled and even lose control. Keep thecruise control switch off until you want to usecruise control.

1. Press the ON-OFF button at the end of the cruisecontrol lever. The CRUISE light on the instrumentpanel cluster will come on. See Cruise Control Lighton page 3-39 for more information.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Move the lever down to SET/COAST and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

3-9

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose the cruise control is set at a desired speedand then you apply the brake. This will shut off cruisecontrol. But you won’t need to reset it.

Unless you’re going less than 25 mph (40 km/h) youcan push the lever up to RES/ACC(Resume/Accelerate). You’ll go right back up to yourchosen speed and stay there.

The cruise control set speed is erased from memory if thevehicle speed goes below 25 mph (40 km/h). If yourpreset speed cancels out at speeds above 25 mph(40 km/h), there may be a problem with your vehicle’scruise control. See your dealer.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Move the lever down to SET/COAST.Release the lever and the accelerator pedal. You’llnow cruise at the higher speed.

• Move the cruise lever up to RES/ACC. Hold it thereuntil you get up to the speed you want, and thenrelease the lever.

• To increase your speed in very small amounts,move the lever to RES/ACC briefly and then releaseit. Each time you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

3-10

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce your speed while usingcruise control:

• Push and hold the lever to SET/COAST until youreach the lower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push the leverdown briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle willslow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hills dependsupon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.

When going up steep hills, you may have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain your speed.

When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift toa lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,applying the brake or downshifting to SECOND (2) orLOW (L) takes you out of cruise control. Manydrivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are several ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal or push theclutch pedal, if you have a manual transaxle.

• Press the CRUISE ON-OFF button again.

• Pull the cruise control lever toward you.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, yourcruise control set speed memory is erased. The setspeed memory is also erased when the vehicle speed isless than 25 mph (40 km/h).

3-11

Exterior Lamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

O(Exterior Lamps): Turn the outside part of thelever with the symbol on it, to operate the lamps.

The exterior lamp switch has three positions:

OFF: Turning the switch to this position turns off alllamps, except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).

O (Parking Lamps): Turning the switch to this positionturns on the parking lamps together with the following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamp

• Instrument Panel Lights

3(Headlamps): Turning the switch to this positionturns on the headlamps, together with the previouslylisted lamps and lights.

Turn the switch to OFF to turn off the lamps.

- (Fog Lamps): You can also use the control leverto turn on the fog lamps. They will come on onlywhen the headlamps are on low beam.

3-12

Automatic Headlamp SystemYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic light sensoron the top left corner of the instrument panel, so besure it is not covered or the headlamps will be oncontinuously.

When it is dark enough outside, your automaticheadlamp system will turn on your low-beam headlampsat the normal brightness along with other lamps suchas the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps andinstrument panel lights. The parking brake must bereleased for the automatic headlamp system to work.This is indicated by the headlamp symbol on yourinstrument panel cluster.

If you are driving through a parking garage, overcastweather, or a tunnel, the automatic headlamp systemmay turn on your low-beam headlamps at a normalbrightness along with the taillamps, sidemarker, parkinglamps and the instrument panel lights. The radio lightswill be dimmer, and the instrument panel cluster lightsmay dim. There will be a delay of several seconds beforethe lights will turn on when starting the car at night.

Headlamps On ReminderIf you turn the ignition to LOCK or ACC and leavethe lamps on, you’ll hear a tone when you open thedriver’s door.

Daytime Running LampsDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in the shortperiods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functionaldaytime running lamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make your headlamps come on ata reduced brightness when the following conditionsare met:

• The ignition is on with the engine running,

• the exterior lamps switch is off and

• the parking brake is released.

When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be onat a reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarkerand other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panelwon’t be lit up either.

When you turn the exterior lamp switch to the headlampposition, your DRL will go off and your headlamps willcome on. The other lamps that come on with yourheadlamps will also come on.

3-13

When it begins to get dark, the headlamps willautomatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.See “Automatic Headlamp System” earlier in this section.

When you turn the exterior lamp switch off, the regularlamps will go off and your headlamps will change to thereduced brightness of DRL provided it is not darkoutside. DRL also comes on if only the parking lampsare being used.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, do the following:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition off.

3. Turn the ignition back on.

The DRL will stay off until you release the parkingbrake.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

Interior Lamps

Instrument Panel Brightness

The instrument panelbrightness control islocated to the left of thesteering wheel on theinstrument panel.

3-14

The brightness of the instrument panel lights willdecrease when the headlamps are on. It is recommendedthat the brightness level is kept at the maximum settingfor all daytime driving to insure proper visibility.

The interior light has the following positions:

OFF: This position turns the light off.

ON: This position keeps the light on all the time.

6 (Door): This position turns the light on when anyof the side doors, the liftgate or the liftglass is opened.The light goes off when all the side doors, the liftgateand the liftglass are closed.

Entry LightingWhile the instrument panel brightness control is in thedoor position, the light will come on when any side door,the liftgate or the liftglass is opened. After all the sidedoors, liftgate and liftglass are closed, and the key is outof the ignition, in LOCK or ACC, the light will remainon for about 15 seconds and then go out except underthe following conditions:

• The ignition is turned to ACC or ON after all the sidedoors, the liftgate and the liftglass are closed.

• All the side doors and liftgate are locked when theliftglass is closed and the light is still on.

When any side door is unlocked with the key or remotekeyless entry system transmitter, the light comes onfor 15 seconds, even if the door is not opened.

To prevent the battery from draining, the lampswill automatically turn off when the key is in theACC or LOCK positions or if the key is removedfor 20 minutes or more.

3-15

Reading Lamp

If you have a sunroof, you will have a reading lampnear the sunroof switch. Press the button to turnthe lamp on and press it again to turn it off.

If you do not have a sunroof, your vehicle’s insiderearview mirror may be equipped with reading lamps.If your vehicle is equipped with reading lamps, there aretwo buttons located on the bottom of the mirror. Pressthe buttons to turn the lamps on and press them again toturn the lamps off.

To prevent the battery from draining, the lamps willautomatically turn off when the key is in the ACCor LOCK positions or if the key is removed for 20minutes or more. The lights will come on when any ofthe doors are opened or if the key is turned to theON position.

3-16

Accessory Power OutletsWith the accessory power outlet, you can plug inauxiliary electrical equipment.

The accessory power outlet is located in the centerconsole storage area.

To use the outlet, the ignition must be in ON or ACC.Pull down the small cover to access the outlet.

Notice: When using an accessory power outlet,maximum electrical load must not exceed 15 amps.Always turn off any electrical equipment whennot in use. Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain your battery.

These circuits are protected by a fuse and havemaximum current levels.

Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatibleto the power accessory outlet and could result inblown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience aproblem see your dealer for additional information on thepower accessory plugs.

Notice: Adding some electrical equipment to yourvehicle can damage it or keep other things fromworking as they should. This wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty. Check with your dealer beforeadding electrical equipment, and never use anythingthat exceeds the amperage rating.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow theproper installation instructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessoryplugs only. Do not hang any type of accessoryor accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use ofthe power outlet can cause damage not coveredby your warranty.

3-17

Power Outlet 115 Volt AlternatingCurrentWith this power outlet, you can plug in auxiliary electricalequipment with a maximum limit of 115 VAC. If youtry to use equipment that requires more than the limit, aprotection circuit will cut the power supply. The powerwill automatically restart when equipment that operateswithin the limit is plugged in.

The power outlet is located near the center of theinstrument panel. Before using the outlet, turn on theignition and press the button next to the outlet.An indicator light in the button will come on. After usingthe outlet, press the button again to turn it off.

The power outlet is not designed for the followingelectrical equipment and they may not work properly:

• Equipment with high initial peak wattage:cathode-ray tube type televisions,compressor-driven refrigerators, electricpower tools.

• Other equipment requiring an extremely stablepower supply: microcomputer-controlled electricblankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

3-18

Ashtrays and Cigarette LighterNotice: Don’t put papers or other flammable itemsinto your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other smokingmaterials could ignite them, causing a damaging fire.

To use the lighter, push the lighter in all the wayand let go. When it’s ready, it will pop backout by itself. If the engine is not running, the keymust be in ACC to use the lighter.

It is not recommended to use the cigarette lighter toplug in auxiliary electrical equipment. Use the accessorypower outlet for phones and other electrical equipment.See Accessory Power Outlets on page 3-17 or PowerOutlet 115 Volt Alternating Current on page 3-18.

Notice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with yourhand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able toback away from the heating element when it’sready. That can make it overheat, damaging thelighter and the heating element.

Your vehicle has a removable ashtray that sits in yourfront cupholder in the center console storage area.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating, coolingand ventilation for your vehicle.

Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the center knob away from OFF to turnthe system on. Turn the knob toward HI to increasefan speed.

If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highestsetting, the passenger compartment air filter mayneed to be replaced. For more information, seePassenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-23 andShort Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-7.

3-19

To change the current mode, select one of the following:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the upperinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs the air to the upperinstrument panel outlets, and to the floor outlets.

6(Floor): This mode directs the air to the floor outletsand to the outboard outlets (for the side windows).

? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outsideair from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from entering your vehicle or tohelp heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.Press this button, located in the center of the instrumentpanel to the left of the audio system, to turn therecirculation mode on or off. When the button is pressed,an indicator light in the button will come on. Press thebutton again to turn off recirculate and to circulateoutside air through the system. The indicator light willgo off. Recirculate is automatically turned off whenthe climate control system mode knob is turned to defogor defrost or is between modes.

Temperature Control: Turn the right knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thetemperature inside your vehicle.

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button, located inthe center of the instrument panel to the left of the audiosystem, to turn the air-conditioning system on or off.When A/C is pressed, an indicator light in the button willcome on to let you know that the air conditioning isactivated.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside airescape; then close them. This helps to reduce the timeit takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helpsthe system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select the recirculation mode.

3. Select A/C.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

The air-conditioning system removes moisture from theair, so you may sometimes notice a small amount ofwater dripping underneath your vehicle while idlingor after turning off the engine. This is normal.

3-20

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. Thiscan be minimized if the climate control system isused properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frostfrom your windshield. Use the defog mode to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog orfrost from the windshield more quickly.

- (Defog): This mode directs the air between thewindshield, side windows, instrument panel outlets andthe floor outlets. The air-conditioning compressorwill run automatically in this setting without pressingA/C, unless the outside temperature is at or belowfreezing.

1 (Defrost): This mode directs the air to thewindshield, instrument panel outlets and the sidewindows. The air-conditioning compressor will runautomatically in this setting without pressing A/C, unlessthe outside temperature is at or below freezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid to clearfog from the rear window.

The rear window defoggerbutton is located on thecenter of the instrumentpanel, above the audiosystem. The defogger doesnot operate with the rearliftglass opened.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in ON.

=(Rear Defogger): Press the defogger button to turnthe rear window defogger on or off. An indicator lightin the button will come on to let your know that the rearwindow defogger is activated. Be sure to clear asmuch snow from the rear window as possible.

3-21

The rear window defogger will turn off automaticallyapproximately 15 minutes after the button is pressed.The defogger can also be turned off by pressingthe button again or by turning off the engine.

Notice: Don’t use a razor blade or something elsesharp on the inside of the rear window. If youdo, you could cut or damage the defogger and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, adecal or anything similar to the defogger grid.

Outlet Adjustment

Use the air outlets locatedin the center and outboardsides of the instrumentpanel, to change thedirection of the air flowingthrough the vents.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objectsto help circulate the air inside of your vehicle moreeffectively.

• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at thehighest setting, the passenger compartment air filtermay need to be replaced. For more information,see “Passenger Compartment Air Filter” followingand Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-7.

3-22

Passenger Compartment Air FilterPassenger compartment air, both outside andrecirculated air, is routed through a passengercompartment air filter. The filter removes certaincontaminants from the air, including pollen and dustparticles. Reductions in airflow, which may occur morequickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needsto be replaced early. An air filter is available throughyour dealer. For how often to change the air filter,see Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-7.

The access panel for the air filter is behind the glovebox. To replace the filter, follow these steps:

1. Lower the glove box door and remove the screw onthe right side of the glovebox with a tool. Slide thearm of the glovebox off.

2. Push each side of the glovebox in and pulltoward you.

3-23

3. Lift the snaps on the filter cover to removethe cover.

4. Remove the air filter.

5. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.

If you choose not to replace the air filter after removingit, using your vehicle without a filter won’t causedamage.

3-24

Warning Lights, Gages andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages thatmay be on your vehicle. The pictures will help youlocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention toyour warning lights and gages could also save youor others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you willsee in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they’re working. If you arefamiliar with this section, you should not be alarmedwhen this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work together to let you know whenthere’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhen you are driving, or when one of the gages showsthere may be a problem, check the section that tells youwhat to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costly- and even dangerous.So please get to know your warning lights and gages.They’re a big help.

3-25

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fastyou’re going, how much fuel is left in the tank and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.

United States Cluster Shown, Canada Similar

3-26

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).Your odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven, in miles.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs anew odometer installed.

If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the oldodometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s setat zero and a label must be put on the driver’s door toshow the old mileage reading when the new odometerwas installed.

Trip OdometersThe trip odometers can tell you how far your vehicle hasbeen driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.

The button located on theright side of the instrumentpanel cluster allows youto switch between theodometer and the two tripodometers.

Press the button once to switch to TRIP A and again toswitch to TRIP B. To return the display to the odometerreading, press the trip odometer button again.

To set the trip odometers to zero, press and hold theknob on the right side of the instrument panel.

3-27

Tachometer

The tachometer showsengine speed inthousands of revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Notice: Do not operate the engine with thetachometer in the red area, or engine damagemay occur.

Temperature DisplayThe outside air temperature is displayed on the centerof the instrument panel, within the speedometer.The display will show the outside air temperature inFahrenheit with a range from -22°F to 122° F(−30°C to 50°C).

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON or START, a chime willcome on for several seconds to remind people to fastentheir safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light willalso flash until the driver’sbelt is buckled. If thedriver’s belt is alreadybuckled, neither the chimenor the light will come on.

3-28

Your vehicle also has a safety belt reminder light for theright front passenger position.

This light is located on thecenter of the instrumentpanel, above the audiosystem.

When the key is turned to ON or START, this light willcome on as a reminder for the right front passengerto fasten the safety belt. The safety belt light will flashuntil the right front passenger’s safety belt is buckled.The passenger’s safety belt reminder light will notilluminate if the right front passenger’s belt is alreadybuckled or if a sensor does not detect the weightof a passenger in that seat.

If something is placed on the right front passenger’sseat, the sensors in the seat may detect that object andcause the right front passenger’s safety belt reminderlight to come on. If this ever happens, move the object tothe rear seat or place it in a rear storage area, if at allpossible.

3-29

Air Bag Readiness LightThere is an air bag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows the air bag symbol. The systemchecks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.The system check includes the air bag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.For more information on the air bag system, seeSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) on page 1-47.

This light will come on forabout seven secondswhen you start yourvehicle. Then the lightshould go out. This meansthe system is ready.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start thevehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicleserviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the air bag readiness light stays on or keepsflashing after you start your vehicle, it meansthe air bag system and safety belt pretensionsystem may not be working properly. The airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash,or they could even inflate without a crash.To help avoid injury to yourself or others, haveyour vehicle serviced right away if the air bagreadiness light stays on after you start yourvehicle.

The air bag readiness light should come on for aboutseven seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-30

Charging System Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turn on theignition, but the engine isnot running, as a check toshow you it is working.Then it should go out whenthe engine starts.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you mayhave a problem with the electrical charging system. Itcould indicate that you have a loose generator drive beltor another electrical problem. Have it checked right away.Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the chargingsystem light on, be certain to turn off all youraccessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into twoparts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can stillwork and stop you. For good braking, though, you needboth parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.Have your brake system inspected right away.

If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this light shouldcome on when you turn the key to START. If it doesn’tcome on then, have it fixed so it will be ready towarn you if there’s a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill also come on when you set your parking brake.The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’trelease fully. If it stays on after your parking brake isfully released, it means you have a brake problem.

United States Canada

3-31

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off theroad and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal isharder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,have the vehicle towed for service. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 3-32 and Towing YourVehicle on page 4-30.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning light ison. Driving with the brake system warning lighton can lead to an accident. If the light is stillon after you’ve pulled off the road and stoppedcarefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight

With the anti-lock brake system, the light will come onwhen your engine is started and may stay on for severalseconds. That’s normal.

United States Canada

3-32

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. Or, if thelight comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engineagain to reset the system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicleneeds service. If the regular brake system warning lightisn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t haveanti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakesand there’s a problem with your regular brakes. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 3-31.

The anti-lock brake system warning light will come onbriefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This isnormal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If thegage pointer moves into the red area, your engine istoo hot! It means that your engine has overheated. If youhave been operating your vehicle under normal drivingconditions, you should pull off the road, stop yourvehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating on page 5-30.

United States Canada

3-33

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer whichmonitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels for thelife of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service is required.Malfunctions often will be indicated by the systembefore any problem is apparent. This may prevent moreserious damage to your vehicle. This system is alsodesigned to assist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with thislight on, after a while, your emission controlsmay not work as well, your fuel economy may notbe as good and your engine may not run assmoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that maynot be covered by your warranty.

United States Canada

3-34

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of yourvehicle or replacement tires that do not match yourvehicle’s original tires can affect your vehicle’semission controls and may cause this light to comeon. Modifications to these systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by your warranty.This may also result in a failure to pass a requiredEmission Inspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it isworking, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. If the light doesn’t come on, have itrepaired. This light will also come on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand may damage the emission control system onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

• Light On Steady — An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Diagnosis and service may be required.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed.

• Avoiding hard accelerations.

• Avoiding steep uphill grades.

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see“If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restartthe engine. If the light remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is stillflashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealerfor service as soon as possible.

3-35

If the Light Is On SteadyYou also may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully installthe cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The conditionwill usually be corrected when the electrical systemdries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality willcause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stallingwhen you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)This will be detected by the system and cause thelight to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has theproper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problems that may havedeveloped.

3-36

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormay begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things you need to know to help yourvehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the CheckEngine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completelydiagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happen ifyou have recently replaced your battery or if yourbattery has run down. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this and your vehiclestill does not pass the inspection for lack of OBDsystem readiness, your GM dealer can prepare thevehicle for inspection.

3-37

Oil Pressure Light

If you have a problem withyour oil, this light may stayon after you start yourengine or come on whenyou are driving.

This indicates that there is not enough oil pressure tokeep your engine properly lubricated and cool.

The engine could be low on oil, or have some other oilrelated problem. Have it fixed right away.

The oil light could also come on in three other situations.

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test to show youit is working, but the light will go out when youturn the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come on withthe ignition on, you may have a problem with thefuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.

• Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, thelight may blink on and off. This is normal.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on fora moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.If you do, your engine can become so hot thatit catches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.

Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oilproblems can be costly and is not covered byyour warranty.

3-38

Cruise Control Light

The CRUISE light appearswhenever you use theON-OFF button to set yourcruise control. See“Cruise Control” underTurn Signal/MultifunctionLever on page 3-5.

Overdrive Off Light

Your automatic transaxlehas overdrive. The lightwill come on whenever youturn off the overdrive.See “Overdrive Off” underAutomatic TransaxleOperation on page 2-20.

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

This light will come onwhen your windshieldwasher fluid is low(Canada Only).

Door Ajar Light

This light will come on ifany door, the rear liftgateor the rear liftglass arenot completely closed.

3-39

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage shows about how much fuel is in yourtank. There is an arrow on the fuel gage that indicatesthat the fuel filler door is on the left side of yourvehicle. The fuel gage works only when the ignitionswitch is ON. When the gage first indicates E or empty,you still have a little fuel left, about 1 or 2 gallons(3.8 L or 7.6 L), but you need to get more right away.When your vehicle is low on fuel the low fuel warninglight, located below the empty mark, will also come on toremind you to add fuel.

Here are five things some owners ask about. None ofthese show a problem with your fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off beforethe gage reads F or full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than thegage indicated. For example, the gage may haveindicated the tank was half full, but it actually tookmore or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill it.

• It takes the gage several minutes to read F or fullafter filling the vehicle with fuel.

• The gage moves a little when you turn, stop orspeed up.

• The gage doesn’t go back to E or empty when youturn off the ignition.United States Canada

3-40

Audio System(s)Notice: Before you add any sound equipment toyour vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobiletelephone or two-way radio – be sure you canadd what you want. If you can, it’s very important todo it properly. Added sound equipment mayinterfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,radio or other systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that has been addedimproperly.

So, before adding sound equipment, check withyour dealer and be sure to check federal rulescovering mobile radio and telephone units.

Your audio system has been designed to operate easilyand to give years of listening pleasure. You will getthe most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself withit first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,find out what your audio system can do and how tooperate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting themost out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

Setting the TimeYour radio may have a button marked with an H or HRto represent hours and an M or MIN to representminutes.

Press and hold the hour button until the correct hourappears on the display. AM will also appear for morninghours. Press and hold the minute button until thecorrect minute appears on the display. The time may beset with the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcastingRadio Data System (RDS) information, press andhold the hour and minute buttons at the same time untilUPDATED appears on the display. If the time is notavailable from the station, NO UPDATE will appear onthe display.

3-41

Radio with CD

Your radio has a blinking red light that is used as atheft-deterrent feature. The light will blink whenever yourignition is off.

Radio Data System (RDS)Your audio system is equipped with a Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features are available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.With RDS, your radio can do the following:• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of

programming• Receive announcements concerning local and

national emergencies• Display messages from radio stations• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station nameor the call letters will appear on the display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations may also provide the time ofday, a program type (PTY) for current programming, andthe name of the program being broadcast.

XM™ Radio Satellite Service(USA Only)XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio servicethat offers 100 coast to coast channels includingmusic, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,including song title and artist name. A service fee isrequired in order to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

3-42

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system onand off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease volume.

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): This button isinoperable on this radio.

RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequency and the time.Pushing this knob with the ignition off will displaythe time.

For XM™ (USA only, if equipped), push this buttonwhile in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categoriesof information related to the current song or channel:Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, ChannelNumber/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, push the knobuntil you see the display you want, then hold the knobuntil the display flashes. The selected display willnow be the default.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (USA only, if equipped). Thedisplay will show your selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.

w SEEKx: Press the up or the down arrow to go tothe next or to the previous station and stay there.

The radio will seek only to stations that are in theselected band and only to those with a strong signal.

w SCANx: Press and hold one of the SCAN arrowsfor two seconds until SCAN appears on the displayand you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, playfor a few seconds, then go on to the next station.Press one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold one of theSCAN arrows for more than four seconds until PSCANand the preset number appear on the display. Youwill hear a double beep. The radio will go to the firstpreset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a fewseconds, then go on to the next preset station. Pressone of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning presets.

The radio will scan only to stations that are in theselected band and only to those with a strong signal.

3-43

Setting Preset StationsThe six numbered pushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (USAonly, if equipped), by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, orXM1 or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever youpress that numbered pushbutton, the stationyou set will return and the equalization that youselected will also be automatically selected for thatpushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, MID,or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT LEDindicator will light to show that the tone control can beadjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or todecrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want todecrease the treble.

Pressing and holding the TONE button until FLATappears on the display will return all of the tone controlsto the middle position.

EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customizedbass, mid, and treble equalization settings.

You can set up to six customized equalization settingsby performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob tocreate the desired equalization.

3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and theEQ symbol will flash.

4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select thedesired EQ number.

5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECTknob to store the equalization setting and thenumber. You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED willappear on the display.

6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings andnumbers.

EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use withtalk radio, but it can be preset to a different tone.

3-44

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL (Balance): Press and release this button untilBAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicatorwill light to show that the speakers can be adjusted.Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound toward theleft or the right speakers.

FADE: Press and release this button until FADEappears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator willlight to show that the speakers can be adjusted.Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound toward thefront or the rear speakers.

Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for twoseconds will return all speaker settings to the middleposition.

Finding a PTY Station (RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:

1. Press PROG TYPE. The PTY symbol will bedisplayed on the screen.

2. Select a category by turning the SELECT knob.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow to select the category and take you tothe category’s first station.

4. If you want to go to another station within thatcategory and the category is displayed, presseither SEEK arrow once. If the category is notdisplayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to displaythe category and then to go to another station.

5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type mode.

SCAN: You can also scan through the channels withina category by performing the following:

1. Press PROG TYPE. The PTY symbol will bedisplayed on the screen.

2. Select a category by turning the SELECT knob.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, press andhold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will beginscanning within your chosen category.

4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at aparticular station.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame programming. Press and hold BAND for twoseconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON willappear on the display. The radio may switch to strongerstations. Press and hold BAND again for two seconds toturn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on thedisplay. The radio will not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite RadioService.

3-45

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite program types (PTYs). These pushbuttons havefactory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs(six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.

2. Press PROG TYPE, if it is not already on.

3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever youpress that numbered pushbutton, the PTY youset will return, if program type select modeis activated.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of national or local emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is mutedor a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc playeris playing, play will stop during the announcement.You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO will appear on the display. Press thisbutton to see the message. The message may displaythe artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the whole message is not displayed, parts of itwill appear every three seconds. To scroll through themessage at your own speed, press the INFO buttonrepeatedly. A new group of words will appear onthe display with each press. Once the completemessage has been displayed, INFO will disappear fromthe display until another new message is received.The old message can be displayed by pressingthe INFO button until a new message is received or adifferent station is tuned to.

3-46

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, thetuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.To receive the traffic announcement from the tunedstation, press this button. Brackets will be displayedaround TRAF and when a traffic announcement comeson the tuned radio station you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press this button and the radiowill seek to a station that does. When the radio finds astation that broadcasts traffic announcements, it willstop and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. Whena traffic announcement comes on the tuned radiostation you will hear it. If no station is found, NOTRAFFIC will appear on the display.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, youcan then press the TRAF button to remove the bracketsor use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to astation that supports traffic announcements. If no stationis found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

Your radio will also interrupt the play of a cassette tape ora CD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements and the brackets are displayed.

This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite RadioService.

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: Your audio system has been calibratedfor your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appearson the display, it means that your radio has not beenconfigured properly for your vehicle and must bereturned to the dealership for service.

3-47

XM™ Radio MessagesRadio Display

Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryptioncode

The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in alocation that is blocking the XM signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of yourpresets, you may need to choose another station for thatpreset button.

No Info Artist Name/Feature notavailable

No artist information is available at this time on thischannel. Your system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Title notavailable

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. Your system is working properly.

3-48

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)Radio Display

Message Condition Action Required

No Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. Your system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at thistime on this channel. Your system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the category youselected. Your system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive thismessage after having your vehicle serviced, check with theservicing facility.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If you tune to channel 0, you will see this messagealternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate your service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retaillocation.

3-49

Playing a Compact DiscWith the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot,label side up. The player will pull it in and the discshould begin playing. If you want to insert a CD whenthe ignition is off, first press the eject symbol or push theRCL knob. If you insert a CD with the radio off andthe ignition on, it will start to play.

When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will bedisplayed. If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it willbe activated each time you play a CD.

As each new track starts to play, the track number willappear on the display.

The integral CD player can play the smaller 8cm singlediscs with an adapter ring. Full-size compact discsand the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced dueto CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. You may experience anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occurtry a known good CD.

Do not add paper labels to discs, they could get caughtin the CD player.

Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard adapter disc.

If an error appears on the display, see “Compact DiscMessages” later in this section.

\1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toadvance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release it to play the passage. Thedisplay will show elapsed time.

RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RDM and the track number will appear on the display.

4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound ata reduced volume. Release it to play the passage.The display will show elapsed time.

EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desiredcustomized equalization setting while playing a compactdisc. The equalization will be automatically setwhenever you play a compact disc. See “EQ” listedpreviously for more information.

w SEEKx: Press the down arrow while playing aCD to go to the start of the current track if morethan eight seconds have played. Press the up arrow togo to the next track. If you hold the button or pressit more than once, the player will continue movingbackward or forward through the disc.

3-50

w SCANx: Press and hold one of the arrows formore than two seconds until SCAN and the tracknumber appear on the display and you hear a beep.The disc will go to the next track, play for a few seconds,then go on to the next track. Press this button againto stop scanning.

RCL (Recall): Push this button to see how long thecurrent track has been playing. To change the default onthe display (track and elapsed time), push the knobuntil you see the display you want, then hold the knobuntil the display flashes. The selected display willnow be the default. While elapsed time is showing, CDTIME will appear on the display.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when aCD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play acompact disc when listening to the radio. CD will appearon the display when a compact disc is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject maybe activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDsmay be loaded with the radio and ignition off if thisbutton is pressed first.

Compact Disc Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radiodisplay and the disc comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:

• You’re driving on a very rough road. When the roadbecomes smoother, the disc should play.

• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can not becorrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displaysan error message, write it down and provide it to yourdealer when reporting the problem.

3-51

Radio with Six-Disc CD

Your radio has a blinking red light that is used as atheft-deterrent feature. The light will blink whenever yourignition is off.

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system onand off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease volume.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has afeature called automatic volume. With this feature,your audio system adjusts automatically to make up forroad and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting willallow for more volume compensation at faster vehiclespeeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increasesthe volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at anyspeed. The volume level should always sound the sameto you as you drive. If you don’t want to use automaticvolume, select OFF.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequency and the time.Pressing this knob with the ignition off will displaythe time.

To change the default on the display, press the knobuntil you see the display you want, then hold theknob until the display flashes. The selected display willnow be the default.

3-52

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,or AM. The display will show your selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

sSEEKt: Press the right or the left arrow to go tothe next or to the previous station and stay there.

The radio will seek only to stations that are in theselected band and only to those with a strong signal.

sSCANt: Press and hold either SCAN arrowfor two seconds until SC appears on the display andyou hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play fora few seconds, then go on to the next station. Presseither SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCANarrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN willappear on the display. You will hear a double beep.The radio will go to a preset station stored on yourpushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to thenext preset station. Press either SCAN arrow againto stop scanning presets.

The radio will scan only to stations that are in theselected band and only to those with a strong signal.

Setting Preset StationsThe six numbered pushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever youpress that numbered pushbutton, the stationyou set will return and the equalization that youselected will also be automatically selected for thatpushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-53

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID, orTREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increaseor to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you maywant to decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middleposition, select BASS, MID, or TREB and push and holdthe AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beepand adjust the display level to zero.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. The radio will produceone beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this buttonto choose between bass, midrange and trebleequalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk,pop, rock, and classical program types.

To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM), press theAUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display.Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass,midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BALappears on the display. Turn the knob to move thesound toward the left or the right speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears onthe display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward thefront or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middleposition, select balance or fade and push and hold theAUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and willadjust the display level to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone orspeaker controls are displayed. The radio will produceone beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.

3-54

Radio Data System (RDS)Your audio system is equipped with a Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features are available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, your radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type ofprogramming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While you are tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or the call letters will appear on the display insteadof the frequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

Finding a PTY StationTo select and find a desired PTY perform the following:

1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the lastselected PTY will be displayed on the screen.

2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow to select the category and take you tothe category’s first station.

4. If you want to go to another station within thatcategory and the category is displayed, presseither SEEK arrow once. If the category is notdisplayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to displaythe category and then to go to another station.

5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, goback to Step 1.

If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will searchfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold theP-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTYyou want to interrupt with. When selected, an asteriskwill appear beside that PTY on the display. Youmay select multiple interrupts if desired. When you arelistening to a compact disc, the last selected RDSstation will interrupt play if that selected program typeformat is broadcast.

3-55

SCAN: You can also scan through the channels withina category by performing the following:

1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the lastselected PTY will be displayed on the screen.

2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, press andhold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will beginscanning within your chosen category.

4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at aparticular station.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. Press and hold BAND for twoseconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ONwill appear on the display. The radio may switch tostronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for twoseconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFFwill appear on the display. The radio will not switch toother stations. When you turn the ignition off and then onagain, the alternate frequency feature will automaticallybe turned on.

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite program types (PTYs). These pushbuttons havefactory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs(six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.

2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program typeselect mode.

3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever youpress that numbered pushbutton, the PTY youset will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is mutedor a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc playeris playing, play will stop during the announcement.You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.

3-56

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO will appear on the display. Press thisbutton to see the message. The message may displaythe artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the whole message is not displayed, parts of itwill appear every three seconds. To scroll through themessage at your own speed, press the INFO buttonrepeatedly. A new group of words will appear onthe display with each press. Once the completemessage has been displayed, INFO will disappear fromthe display until another new message is received.The old message can be displayed by pressingthe INFO button until a new message is received or adifferent station is tuned to.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, thetuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.To receive the traffic announcement from the tunedstation, press this button. Brackets will be displayedaround TRAF and when a traffic announcement comeson the tuned radio station you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press this button and the radiowill seek to a station that does. When the radio finds astation that broadcasts traffic announcements, it willstop and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. Whena traffic announcement comes on the tuned radiostation you will hear it. If no station is found, NOTRAFFIC will appear on the display.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, youcan then press the TRAF button to remove the bracketsor use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to astation that supports traffic announcements. If no stationis found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

Your radio will play the traffic announcements even if thevolume is muted or interrupt the play of a CD if the lasttuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and thebrackets are displayed.

Playing a Compact DiscThe integral CD player can play the smaller 8cm singlediscs with an adapter ring. Full-size compact discsand the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced dueto CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. You may experience anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occurtry a know good CD.

Do not add paper labels to discs, they could get caughtin the CD player.

Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard adapter disc.

If an error appears on the display, see “Compact DiscMessages” later in this section.

3-57

LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button toload CDs into the compact disc player. This compactdisc player will hold up to six discs.

To insert one disc, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CDbutton.

3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, toturn green.

4. Load a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot,label side up. The player will pull the disc in.

When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will bedisplayed. If you select an equalization setting for yourdisc, it will be activated each time you play a disc.

If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to playautomatically.

To insert multiple discs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CDbutton for two seconds.You will hear a beep and the light, located to theright of the slot, will begin to flash.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, loada disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The player will pull the disc in.Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashingagain. Once the light stops flashing and turnsgreen you can load another disc. The disc playertakes up to six discs. Do not try to load morethan six.

To load more than one disc but less than six, completeSteps 1 through 3. When you have finished loadingdiscs, with the radio on or off, press the LOAD side ofthe LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function. Theradio will begin to play the last CD loaded.

When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will bedisplayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, anumber for each disc will be displayed. If you select anequalization setting for your disc, it will be activatedeach time you play a disc.

If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will begin toplay automatically.

As each new track starts to play, the track number willappear on the display.

3-58

Playing a Specific LoadedCompact DiscFor every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radiodisplay. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUXbutton to start playing a CD. Then press the numberedpushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want toplay. A small bar will appear under the CD number thatis playing, and the track number will appear.

If an error appears on the radio display, see “CompactDisc Messages” later in this section.

LOAD CD Z (Eject): Pressing the CD eject side ofthis button will eject a single disc or multiple discs.To eject the disc that is currently playing, pressand release this button. To eject multiple discs, pressand hold this button for two seconds. You will heara beep and the light will flash to let you know when adisc is being ejected.

REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can now removethe disc. If the disc is not removed, after 25 seconds, thedisc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver.If you try to push the disc back into the receiver,before the 25 second time period is complete, thereceiver will sense an error and will try to eject the discseveral times before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of theLOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have triedto push it in manually. The receiver’s 25-second ejecttimer will reset at each press of eject, which will cause thereceiver to not eject the disc until the 25-second timeperiod has elapsed.

Once the player stops and the disc is ejected, remove thedisc. After removing the disc, press the PWR knob off andthen on again. This will clear the disc-sensing feature andenable discs to be loaded into the player again.

{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release it to play the passage.The display will show elapsed time.

FWD| (Forward): Press and hold this button toadvance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release it to play the passage. Thedisplay will show elapsed time.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one trackor an entire disc. To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, press andrelease the RPT button. RPT will appear on thedisplay. Press RPT again to turn it off.

• To repeat the disc you are listening to, press andhold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT willappear on the display. Press RPT again to turn it off.

3-59

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on onedisc or on all of the discs. To use random, do oneof the following:

• To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order, press and release the RDM button.RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. PressRDM again to turn it off.

• To play the tracks on all of the discs that areloaded in random order, press and hold RDMfor more than two seconds. You will hear a beepand RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. PressRDM again to turn it off.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQto select the desired equalization setting while playinga compact disc. The equalization will be automaticallyset whenever you play a compact disc. For moreinformation on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listedpreviously in this section.

sSEEKt: Press the left arrow to go to the start ofthe current track, if more than ten seconds have passed.Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If youpress the button more than once, the player will continuemoving backward or forward through the disc.

sSCANt: To scan one disc, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of thecurrently selected disc. SCAN will appear on the display.Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded discs, press and hold either SCANarrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of eachdisc loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stopscanning.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long thecurrent track has been playing. To change the defaulton the display (track and elapsed time), press the knobuntil you see the display you want, then hold theknob until the display flashes. The selected display willnow be the default.

BAND: Press this button to play the radio when adisc(s) is in the player.

3-60

Using Song List ModeThe integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature calledsong list. This feature is capable of saving 20 trackselections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least onedisc. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in thissection for more information.

2. Check to see that the disc changer is not in songlist mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display.If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LISTbutton to turn it off.

3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numberedpushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN rightarrow button to locate the track that you wantto save. The track will begin to play.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two ormore seconds to save the track into memory.When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heardimmediately. After two seconds of pressingSONG LIST continuously, two beeps will sound toconfirm that the track has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.

If you attempt to save more than 20 selections, S-LISTFULL will appear on the display.

To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on thedisplay. The recorded tracks will begin to play inthe order that they were saved.

You may seek through the song list by using the SEEKSCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track willreturn you to the first saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.S-LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desiredtrack to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for twoseconds. When pressing SONG LIST, one beepwill be heard immediately. After two secondsof pressing the SONG LIST button continuously,two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track hasbeen deleted.

3-61

After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks aremoved up the list. When another track is added to thesong list, the track will be added to the end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform the followingsteps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.S-LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for morethan four seconds. A beep will be heard, followedby two beeps after two seconds and a final beep willbe heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY willappear on the display indicating that the songlist has been deleted.

If a disc is ejected, and the song list contains savedtracks from that disc, those tracks are automaticallydeleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the songlist again are added to the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed fromthe display.

Compact Disc Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radiodisplay, it could be due to one of the following reasons:

• You’re driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the disc should play.

• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can not becorrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displaysan error message, write it down and provide it to yourdealer when reporting the problem.

3-62

Navigation/Radio System

The display screen is located in the center of theinstrument panel.

Your vehicle may have an AM-FM navigation radiosystem that includes a Radio Data System (RDS) withprogram type selections (PTY) that will seek out the kindof music you want to listen to. The radio system canalso communicate with your navigation system tobroadcast announcements on traffic and emergencyalert communications. For information on how to use thissystem, see the “Navigation/Radio System” supplement.

Understanding Radio Reception

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range, however, cancause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pickup noise from things like storms and power lines. Tryreducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.

FM StereoFM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to come and go.

Navigation/Radio Display and Controls

3-63

XM™ Satellite Radio Service(USA Only)XM™ Satellite Radio gives you digital radio receptionfrom coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildingsor hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causingthe sound to come and go. Your radio may displayNO SIGNAL to indicate interference.

Care of Your CDsHandle discs carefully. Store them in their original casesor other protective cases and away from direct sunlightand dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampena clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solutionand clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the side without writing whenhandling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outeredges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of Your CD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due tothe risk of contaminating the lens of the CD opticswith lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washeswithout being damaged. If the mast should everbecome slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals,you should replace it.

Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightenedto the antenna base located on the roof of the vehicle.If tightening is required, tighten by hand.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystem (United States Only)Your XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on theroof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

The performance of your XM™ system may be affectedif your sunroof is open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interferewith the performance of your XM™ system. Makesure that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.

3-64

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunken Driving .............................................4-2Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5Braking .........................................................4-6All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .........................4-9Steering ........................................................4-9Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12Passing .......................................................4-12Loss of Control .............................................4-14Driving at Night ............................................4-15Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-16City Driving ..................................................4-19

Freeway Driving ...........................................4-20Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-21Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-22Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-22Winter Driving ..............................................4-24If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice

or Snow ...................................................4-28Towing ..........................................................4-30

Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-30Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-30Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-32Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-34

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drivedefensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in yourvehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-8.

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going tobe careless and make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough followingdistance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, inboth city and rural driving. You never know whenthe vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turnsuddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate onthe driving task. Anything that distracts from thedriving task — such as concentrating on a cellulartelephone call, reading, or reaching for something on

the floor — makes proper defensive driving moredifficult and can even cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, orpull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.These simple defensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking and driving isa national tragedy. It is the number one contributorto the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victimsevery year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.

4-2

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adultpopulation — choose never to drink alcohol, so theynever drive after drinking. For persons under 21,it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.There are good medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive. But what if people do? How much is “toomuch” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot lessthan many might think. Although it depends on eachperson and situation, here is some general informationon the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BACof about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glassesof wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, ifthe same person drank three double martinis (3 ouncesor 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A personwho consumes food just before or during drinking willhave a somewhat lower BAC level.

4-3

There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body waterthan men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higher BAClevel than a man of her same body weight will wheneach has the same number of drinks.

The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, andthroughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the UnitedStates is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,and how quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skillsof many people are impaired at a BAC approaching0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. Alldrivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having acollision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at alevel of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcoholin one drink. No amount of coffee or number of coldshowers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not theright answer. What if there is an emergency, a needto take sudden action, as when a child darts intothe street? A person with even a moderate BAC mightnot be able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

4-4

There is something else about drinking and driving thatmany people do not know. Medical research showsthat alcohol in a person’s system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinalcord or heart. This means that when anyone who hasbeen drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,that person’s chance of being killed or permanentlydisabled is higher than if the person had not beendrinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentivenessand judgment can be affected by even asmall amount of alcohol. You can have aserious — or even fatal — collision if youdrive after drinking. Please do not drink anddrive or ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are witha group, designate a driver who will not drink.

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering and the accelerator. All three systems haveto do their work at the places where the tires meetthe road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, itis easy to ask more of those control systems thanthe tires and road can provide. That means you can losecontrol of your vehicle.

4-5

BrakingBraking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.That is perception time. Then you have to bring up yourfoot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But thatis only an average. It might be less with one driverand as long as two or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordinationand eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs andfrustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle movingat 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keepingenough space between your vehicle and others isimportant.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road (whether it is pavementor gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tiretread; the condition of your brakes; the weight ofthe vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This isa mistake. Your brakes may not have time to coolbetween hard stops. Your brakes will wear out muchfaster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pacewith the traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brakenormally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,the pedal may get harder to push down. If your enginestops, you will still have some power brake assist.But you will use it when you brake. Once the powerassist is used up, it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

4-6

Anti-lock Brake SystemYour vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is anadvanced electronic braking system that will helpprevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this warning light onthe instrument panel will come on briefly when youstart your vehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin to driveaway, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise whilethis test is going on, and you may even notice thatyour brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system,the anti-lock brake system warning light will stay on. SeeAnti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-32.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each front wheeland at both rear wheels.

United States Canada

4-7

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressurefaster than any driver could. The computer isprogrammed to make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls braking pressureaccordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If you get too close tothe vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to applyyour brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, eventhough you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-LockDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feela slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,but this is normal.

4-8

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into a situationthat requires hard braking.

If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have anti-lock, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and holdit down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheelscan stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle can notrespond to your steering. Momentum will carry itin whatever direction it was headed when the wheelsstopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the verything you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do this bypushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasingpressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze thebrakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear orfeel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.

This will help you retain steering control. If you do haveanti-lock, it is different. See “Anti-Lock Brake System”in this section.

In many emergencies, steering can help you more thaneven the very best braking.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) SystemIf your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWDsystem operates automatically without any actionrequired by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin toslip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drivethe vehicle as required. There may be a slightengagement noise during hard use but this is normal.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.

4-9

Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves.

Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertiawill keep the vehicle going in the same direction. Ifyou have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, the angle atwhich the curve is banked, and your speed. Whileyou are in a curve, speed is the one factor youcan control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both controlsystems — steering and braking — have to do their work

where the tires meet the road. Unless you havefour-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking candemand too much of those places. You can losecontrol.

The same thing can happen if you are steering througha sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Thosetwo control systems — steering and acceleration — canoverwhelm those places where the tires meet theroad and make you lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the wayyou want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Underless favorable conditions you will want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your frontwheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-10

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front of you. Youcan avoid these problems by braking — if you can stopin time. But sometimes you can not; there is notroom. That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply your brakes — but, unless youhave anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.

See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as muchspeed as you can from a possible collision. Thensteer around the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheelonce you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-11

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou’re driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up toone-quarter turn until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lanehighway is a potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error injudgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or angercan suddenly put the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sidesand to crossroads for situations that might affectyour passing patterns. If you have any doubtwhatsoever about making a successful pass, waitfor a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken center line usually indicates it is allright to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane ora double solid line, even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.

4-12

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For onething, following too closely reduces your area ofvision, especially if you are following a largervehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space ifthe vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,start to accelerate but stay in the right lane anddo not get too close. Time your move so you will beincreasing speed as the time comes to move intothe other lane. If the way is clear to pass, youwill have a “running start” that more than makes upfor the distance you would lose by droppingback. And if something happens to cause you tocancel your pass, you need only slow downand drop back again and wait for anotheropportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,wait your turn. But take care that someone is nottrying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slowvehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulderand check the blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, andstart your left lane change signal before moving outof the right lane to pass. When you are farenough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its frontin your inside mirror, activate your right lanechange signal and move back into the right lane.(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.)

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time ontwo-lane roads. Reconsider before passing thenext vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, itmay be slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

4-13

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems (brakes,steering and acceleration) do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steerand constantly seek an escape route or area of lessdanger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, your wheelsare not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, toomuch speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slipand lose cornering force. And in the accelerationskid, too much throttle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are besthandled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,you will want to slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, accelerationor braking (including engine braking by shifting to alower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide. You may not realize the surface is slipperyuntil your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice or packed snowon the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: Ithelps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not haveanti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels areno longer rolling), release enough pressure on thebrakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restoressteering control. Push the brake pedal down steadilywhen you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheelsare rolling, you will have steering control.

4-14

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely to beimpaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night visionproblems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Don’t drink and drive.

• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slowdown and keep more space between you andother vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Yourheadlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe placeand rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend the day in brightsunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Youreyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But ifyou’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They maycut down on glare from headlamps, but they alsomake a lot of things invisible.

4-15

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or even severalseconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. Whenyou are faced with severe glare (as from a driverwho doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle withmisaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staringdirectly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out. Glare at night is made muchworse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glasscan build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makeslights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keepyour eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as your headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyesbe examined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight blindness — the inability to see in dim light — andaren’t even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wetroad, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as wellbecause your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as ondry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left,you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to goslower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you aredriving. The surface may get wet suddenly when yourreflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-16

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if yourwindshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavyrain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the roadand even people walking.

It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer tank filledwith washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiperinserts when they show signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start toseparate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can cause problems,too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoidpuddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before youhit them.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will notwork as well in a quick stop and may causepulling to one side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of wateror a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightlyuntil your brakes work normally.

4-17

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build upunder your tires that they can actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou’re going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if the pressure inone or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water isstanding on the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, andraindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could behydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badly damageyour engine. Never drive through water that isslightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing water,drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.If you try to drive through flowing water, as youmight at a low water crossing, your vehicle canbe carried away. As little as six inches offlowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignore policewarning signs, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when youpass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clearroom ahead, and be prepared to have yourview restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-61.

4-18

City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is theamount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attentionto traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your trip intoan unknown part of the city just as you would for across-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You’ll save time and energy.See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A trafficlight is there because the corner is busy enoughto need it. When a light turns green, and just beforeyou start to move, check both ways for vehiclesthat have not cleared the intersection or maybe running the red light.

4-19

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are thesafest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at thesame speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads tothe freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway asyou drive along the entrance ramp, you should beginto check traffic. Try to determine where you expectto blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at closeto the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder asoften as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to theposted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then useyour turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle inyour “blind” spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain youallow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, donot, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to the next exit.

4-20

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speedaccording to your speedometer, not to your senseof motion. After driving for any distance at higherspeeds, you may tend to think you are going slowerthan you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If youmust start when you’re not fresh — such as after a day’swork — don’t plan to make too many miles that firstpart of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoesyou can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GMdealerships all across North America. They’ll beready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkedall levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to therecommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlookalong your route? Should you delay your trip ashort time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

4-21

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as “highwayhypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, orwhatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road withthe same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on theroad, the drone of the engine, and the rush of thewind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’tlet it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leavethe road in less than a second, and you could crash andbe injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with acomfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead andto the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service or parking area and take a nap, get someexercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsinesson the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different fromdriving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’replanning to visit there, here are some tips that can makeyour trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluidlevels and also the brakes, tires, cooling systemand transaxle. These parts can work hard onmountain roads.

4-22

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when yougo down a steep or long hill.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakes could getso hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Shift downto let your engine assist your brakes on asteep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

They could get so hot that they would notwork well. You would then have poor brakingor even none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Always have your engine running andyour vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift downto a lower gear. The lower gears help cool yourengine and transaxle, and you can climb thehill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide orcut across the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalled car oran accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocksarea or winding roads. Be alert to these and takeappropriate action.

4-23

Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergency supplies inyour vehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, ifyou will be driving under severe conditions, include asmall bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple ofburlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure youproperly secure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where your tires meetthe road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation.You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need tobe very careful.

4-24

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wetice can be even more trouble because it may offerthe least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’sabout freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain beginsto fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sandcrews can get there.Whatever the condition – smooth ice, packed, blowingor loose snow – drive with caution.Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.

If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin andpolish the surface under the tires even more.Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you’llwant to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock,see Braking on page 4-6. This system improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on aslippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock brakingsystem or not, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes,if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on thebrakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily toget the most traction you can.

Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you’ll just slide. Brakeso your wheels always keep rolling and you can still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterdistance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine untilyou hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On anotherwise clear road, ice patches may appear inshaded areas where the sun can’t reach: aroundclumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpassmay remain icy when the surrounding roads areclear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brakebefore you are on it. Try not to brake while you’reactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

4-25

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow. Here aresome things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou’ve been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you have no blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor mats – anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-26

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You can not see itor smell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking your exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that is away from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a littlefaster than just idle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will need awell-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To helpkeep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and dosome fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so untilhelp comes.

4-27

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Iceor SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you willneed to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin yourwheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” canhelp you get out when you’re stuck, but you mustuse caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, theycan explode, and you or others could beinjured. And, the transaxle or other parts of thevehicle can overheat. That could cause anengine compartment fire or other damage.When you are stuck, spin the wheels as littleas possible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts ofyour vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels too fast while shifting your transaxle backand forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See“Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.”

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,see Tire Chains on page 5-75.

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. That willclear the area around your front wheels. Then shift backand forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear(or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) orSECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheelsas little as possible. Release the accelerator pedalwhile you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning yourwheels in the forward and reverse directions, youwill cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you mayneed to be towed out. Or, you can use your recoveryhook. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 4-30.

4-28

Using the Recovery Hook

Your vehicle is equipped with a recovery hook. Therecovery hook is provided at the front of your vehicle.It can only be used for pulling your vehicle out.

{CAUTION:

The recovery hook, when used, is under a lotof force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.Never pull on the hook at a sideways angle.The hook could break off and you or otherscould be injured from the chain or cablesnapping back.

Notice: Never use the recovery hook to tow thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and itwould not be covered by warranty.

4-29

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towing service ifyou need to have your disabled vehicle towed. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehiclefor recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing your vehiclebehind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing yourvehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dollytowing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels onthe ground and two wheels up on a device knownas a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider before youdo recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professional foradditional advice and equipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as youwould prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’llwant to make sure your vehicle is prepared to betowed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip onpage 4-21.

4-30

Dinghy TowingFor front-wheel-drive vehicles with manual transaxlesonly do the following:

When dinghy towing, be sure to follow the posted legalspeed limit.

1. Put the shift lever in neutral.

2. Turn the ignition to ACC to avoid locking thesteering wheel. Make sure the audio system isturned off and that nothing is plugged into thepower outlets.

3. Release the parking brake.

After dinghy towing, let the engine idle for more thanthree minutes before driving the vehicle.

Do not tow your vehicle from the rear. Your vehiclecould be badly damaged and the repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, will damage drivetraincomponents. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle ifany of its wheels will be on the ground.

4-31

Dolly Towing

If your vehicle is a front-wheel drive vehicle it can betowed using a dolly. To tow your vehicle using a dolly,follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P) for automatic transaxlesand in neutral for manual transaxles.

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed for towing.

5. Release the parking brake.

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, will damage drivetraincomponents. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle ifany of its wheels will be on the ground.

Loading Your Vehicle

4-32

This is an example of what your vehicle’s Tire-LoadingInformation/Certification label might look like. It islocated in the glovebox and shows how much weightyour vehicle may properly carry. The label tells you theproper size, and recommended inflation pressuresfor the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you importantinformation about the number of people that can bein your vehicle and the total weight that you can carry.This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight,and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and allnonfactory-installed options.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGVWR, or either the maximum front or rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change the way your vehiclehandles. These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the rear area of your vehicle.Try to spread the weight evenly. If youhave fold-down rear seats, you’ll find fouranchors on the back wall of your trunk.You can use these anchors to tie downlighter loads. They’re not strong enoughfor heavy things, however, so put themas far forward as you can in the trunk orrear area.

• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so that some of themare above the tops of the seats.

• Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint inyour vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Don’t leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to.

4-33

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipment anddrive properly, you can lose control when youpull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well — or evenat all. You and your passengers could beseriously injured. You may also damage yourvehicle; the resulting repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only ifyou have followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with theproper trailer towing equipment. To identify whatthe vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, youshould read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section. But trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, acceleration, braking, durabilityand fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules. Many ofthese are important for your safety and that of yourpassengers. So please read this section carefully beforeyou pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harderagainst the drag of the added weight. The engineis required to operate at relatively higher speeds andunder greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

4-34

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sureyour rig will be legal, not only where you livebut also where you’ll be driving. A good source forthis information can be state or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitchdealer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Yourengine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps yourengine and other parts of your vehicle wear in atthe heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speedfor trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

• the weight of the trailer,

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,500 lbs. (680 kg).But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. And, it can also dependon any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

You can ask your dealer for our trailering informationor advice, or you can write us at:

Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

4-35

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weightto measure because it affects the total or gross weightof your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo youmay carry in it, and the people who will be riding inthe vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add thetongue load to the GVW because your vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-32 for more information about yourvehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 10–15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer andthen the tongue, separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, you may be able to get them rightsimply by moving some items around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limitfor cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theTire-Loading Information label located in the glovebox.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Then besure you do not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,including the weight of the trailer tongue.

4-36

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Hereare some rules to follow:

• Don’t let the steel in a hitch contact the aluminumon your bumper. If you do, the two will corrode.You can use something like paint or plastic tape toseparate the steel and aluminum. The samesteel to aluminum problem can happen withfasteners too.

• Will you have to make any holes in the body ofyour vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? Ifyou do, then be sure to seal the holes later whenyou remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can getinto your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 2-33. Dirt and water can too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between your vehicleand your trailer. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop tothe road if it becomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chains may be provided by thehitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.Always leave just enough slack so you can turnwith your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes?

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintainthem properly. And, if you have anti-lock brakes, do nottry to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,both systems won’t work well, or at all.

4-37

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to getto know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel ofhandling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.And always keep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch, platform andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller by hand to be surethe brakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead asyou would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.This can help you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deallonger, you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns while traileringcould cause the trailer to come in contact with thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoidmaking very sharp turns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turnsthan normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strikesoft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

4-38

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Checkwith your dealer. The arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lanechange. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behindyou are seeing your signal when they are not. It’simportant to check occasionally to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you startdown a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use your brakes so much thatthey would get hot and no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce yourspeed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce thepossibility of the engine and the transaxle overheating.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with atrailer attached, on a hill. If something goeswrong, your rig could start to move. Peoplecan be injured, and both your vehicle and thetrailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’show to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) for an automatic transaxle or into gear fora manual transaxle, yet. When parking uphill, turnyour wheels away from the curb. When parkingdownhill, turn your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the chocks are in place, release the regularbrakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parkingbrake and shift into PARK (P) for an automatictransaxle or REVERSE (R) for a manual transaxle.

5. Release the regular brakes.

4-39

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal downwhile you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often when you’repulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for moreon this. Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.Each of these is covered in this manual, and theIndex will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,it’s a good idea to review this information before youstart your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheat duringsevere operating conditions. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-30.

4-40

Service ............................................................5-3Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ..............................................5-4Fuel ................................................................5-4

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5California Fuel ...............................................5-5Additives .......................................................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10Hood Release ..............................................5-10Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-16Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-21Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-23Manual Transaxle Fluid ..................................5-25Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-26Engine Coolant .............................................5-27Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-29Engine Overheating .......................................5-30Cooling System ............................................5-32Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-38Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-39

Brakes ........................................................5-40Battery ........................................................5-44Jump Starting ...............................................5-45

All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-51Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-52

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-52Headlamps ..................................................5-52Front Turn Signal Lamps ...............................5-54Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-55Rear Combination Lamps ...............................5-56Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-58Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-59

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-60Tires ..............................................................5-61

Inflation — Tire Pressure ...............................5-67Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-68When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-70Buying New Tires .........................................5-71Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-72Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-73Wheel Replacement ......................................5-74Tire Chains ..................................................5-75If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-76Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-77Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-88

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Appearance Care ............................................5-89Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-89Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-92Weatherstrips ...............................................5-92Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-92Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-94Finish Damage .............................................5-94Underbody Maintenance ................................5-95Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-95Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-95

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-97Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-97Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-97

Electrical System ............................................5-97Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-97Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-98Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-98Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-98Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-98

Capacities and Specifications ........................5-101Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-103

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you tobe happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealerfor all your service needs. You will get genuine GM partsand GM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Doing Your Own Service WorkIf you want to do some of your own service work, you’llwant to use the proper service manual. It tells youmuch more about how to service your vehicle than thismanual can. To order the proper service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-11.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto do your own service work, see Servicing Your AirBag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and listthe mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-28.

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement partsand tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.

CAUTION: (Continued)

5-3

CAUTION: (Continued)

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts andother fasteners. “English” and “metric”fasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehiclecan affect the airflow around it. This may causewind noise and affect windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer before adding equipment tothe outside of your vehicle.

FuelThe 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)shows the code letter or number that identifies yourengine. You will find the VIN at the top left of theinstrument panel. See Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) on page 5-97.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 1.8L engine (VIN Code 8), useregular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 orhigher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get aheavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, usea gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. Alittle pinging noise when you accelerate or driveuphill is considered normal. This does not indicate aproblem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary.If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel andyou hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.

If your vehicle has the 1.8L H.O. DOHC engine(VIN Code L), use only premium unleaded gasoline witha posted octane of 91 or higher. In an emergency,you may be able to use a lower octane — as lowa 87 — if heavy knocking does not occur. Refill yourtank with premium fuel as soon as possible. Otherwise,you might damage your engine. If you are using91 octane or higher-octane fuel and you hear heavyknocking, your engine needs service.

5-4

Gasoline SpecificationsIt is recommended that gasoline meet specificationswhich were developed by automobile manufacturersaround the world and contained in the World-Wide FuelCharter which is available from the Alliance ofAutomobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.Gasoline meeting these specifications could provideimproved driveability and emission control systemperformance compared to other gasoline.

In Canada, look for the“Auto Makers’ Choice”label on the pump.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionStandards (see the underhood emission control label), itis designed to operate on fuels that meet Californiaspecifications. If this fuel is not available in statesadopting California emissions standards, your vehiclewill operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control system performancemay be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp mayturn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-34)and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

Canada Only

5-5

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that will helpprevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,allowing your emission control system to workproperly. You should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations. GeneralMotors recommends that you buy gasolines thatare advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intakevalves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand ofgasoline.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available inyour area to contribute to clean air. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines, particularly ifthey comply with the specifications described earlier.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuelsystem and also damage the plastic and rubberparts. That damage would not be covered underyour warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors doesnot recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuelscontaining MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs andthe performance of the emission control system maybe affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer forservice.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

5-6

Filling Your Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries toyou and others, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island. Turn off yourengine when you are refueling. Don’t smoke ifyou’re near fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames and smoking materials awayfrom fuel. Don’t leave the fuel pumpunattended when refueling your vehicle — thisis against the law in some places. Keepchildren away from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on thedriver’s side of the vehicle.

5-7

The fuel door release leveris located near the floorunder the driver’s seat onthe outboard side.

While refueling, hang the fuel cap inside of thefuel door.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise).

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray outon you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.This spray can happen if your tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hot weather. Openthe fuel cap slowly and wait for any “hiss”noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap allthe way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Don’t top off or overfill yourtank, and wait a few seconds after you’ve finishedpumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean fuel frompainted surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaningthe Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-92.

5-8

When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Makesure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-34.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you’re refueling, don’tremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in theIndex.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can be badly burned and your vehicledamaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed oron any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

5-9

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine partsand start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You orothers could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the release handleinside the vehicle. It’slocated below theinstrument panel to theleft of the steeringwheel.

5-10

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle. Release thesecondary hood release by pulling up on thelever located near the middle of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Release the hood proprod from its retainerand put the hood proprod into the slot inthe hood. To insert thehood prop rod intothe slot, move itstraight up. If it ismoved to the side ortoward the inside of thevehicle, it maybecome detached.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps areon properly. Make sure to return the hood prop rodcarefully back in its retainer before closing the hood toavoid damaging the vehicle.

5-11

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood of the 1.8 L (Code 8) engine, you’ll see the following:

5-12

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-39.

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power SteeringFluid on page 5-38.

C. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Capon page 5-29.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant

on page 5-27.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.

G. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped).See Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-23.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See HydraulicClutch on page 5-26.

I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-21.

J. Battery. See Battery on page 5-44.K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See “Engine

Compartment Fuse Block” under Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-98.

5-13

When you open the hood of the 1.8 L (Code L) H.O. DOHC engine, you’ll see the following:

5-14

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-39.

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power SteeringFluid on page 5-38.

C. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Capon page 5-29.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant

on page 5-27.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.

G. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped).See Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-23.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See HydraulicClutch on page 5-26.

I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-21.

J. Battery. See Battery on page 5-44.K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See “Engine

Compartment Fuse Block” under Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-98.

5-15

Engine Oil

If the engine oil pressurelight appears on theinstrument cluster, itmeans you need to checkyour engine oil levelright away.

For more information, see Oil Pressure Light onpage 3-38.

You should check your engine oil level regularly; this isan added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil dipstick.

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes todrain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oildipstick might not show the actual level.

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, and check the level.

1.8L (Code 8) Engine

1.8L (Code L) Engine

5-16

When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is at or below the hole at the tip of the dipstick,then you will need to add at least one quart of oil.But you must use the right kind. This section explainswhat kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities and Specifications onpage 5-101.

Notice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above theupper mark that shows the proper operating range,your engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

5-17

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. You should look for and useonly an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

5-18

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is bestfor your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,you may use SAE 10W-30.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements should alsohave the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

You should look for this information on the oil container,and use only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbolon the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and showing the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered byyour warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is recommendthat you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or anSAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting andbetter protection for your engine at extremely lowtemperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to your oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol that meet GM StandardGM6094M are all you will need for good performanceand engine protection.

5-19

When to Change Engine OilIf any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/citymaintenance schedule:

• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This isparticularly important when outside temperaturesare below freezing.

• Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequentdriving in stop-and-go traffic).

• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on topof your vehicle.

• The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxior other commercial application.

Driving under these conditions causes engine oil tobreak down sooner. If any one of these is true for yourvehicle, then you need to change your oil and filterevery 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months — whicheveroccurs first.

If none of them are true, use the long trip/highwaymaintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months — whicheveroccurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engineunder highway conditions will cause engine oil tobreak down slower.

5-20

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that may beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it bytaking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have aproblem properly disposing of your used oil, askyour dealer, a service station or a local recycling centerfor help.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

5-21

To check or replace the filter, do the following:

1. Release the two clips that hold the cover down.

2. Lift the cover off.

3. Pull out the engine air cleaner/filter.

4. Install a new engine air cleaner/filter, if needed.

5. Reinstall the cover.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whento replace the air filter.

See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Serviceson page 6-4.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned. Theair cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps tostop flame if the engine backfires. If it is notthere and the engine backfires, you couldbe burned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which will damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place whenyou’re driving.

5-22

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and ChangeA good time to check your automatic transaxle fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Check the fluid in the transaxle and differential every30,000 miles (50 000 km). Change the fluid every60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly drivenunder one or more of these conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

• In hilly or mountainous terrain.

• When doing frequent trailer towing.

• Uses such as found in taxi, police or deliveryservice.

See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services onpage 6-4.

How to CheckBecause this operation can be a little difficult, you maychoose to have this done at the dealership servicedepartment.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damageyour transaxle. Too much can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall on hot engine orexhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading if you check yourtransaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxlefluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic – especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 158°F to 176°F(70°C to 80°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F(10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have todrive longer.

5-23

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the enginerunning.

• With the parking brake applied, place the shift leverin PARK (P).

• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shiftlever through each gear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range. Then, position the shiftlever in PARK (P).

• Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

The automatic transaxledipstick has an orangehandle and is located nearthe front of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

1. Release the tab and pull out the dipstick and wipe itwith a clean rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds andthen pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be between thetwo dimples in the hot range.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; then press the tabdown to lock the dipstick in place.

5-24

How to Add FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-26.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the properfluid to bring the level into the area between dimples onthe dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at thedipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less thanone pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeledT-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid because fluidwith that label is made especially for your automatictransaxle. Damage caused by fluid other than T-IVAutomatic Transmission fluid is not covered by yournew vehicle warranty. See “Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants” in the Index.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check” previously inthis section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push thedipstick back in all the way; then press the tabdown to lock the dipstick in place.

Manual Transaxle Fluid

When to CheckA good time to have it checked is when the engine oil ischanged. However, the fluid in your manual transaxledoesn’t require changing.

How to CheckBecause this operation can be difficult, you may chooseto have this done at your Pontiac dealership servicedepartment.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere, or you could get a false reading.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damageyour transaxle. Too much can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall on hot engine orexhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading if you check yourtransaxle fluid.

Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, thevehicle is parked on a level place and the transaxleis cool enough for you to rest your fingers on thetransaxle case.

5-25

Then, follow these steps:

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom ofthe filler plug hole.

3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sureit is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add morefluid as described in the next steps.

How to Add FluidHere’s how to add fluid. Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. SeePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-26.

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enoughfluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of thefiller plug hole.

3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fullyseated.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir is filledwith DOT-3 brake fluid.

It is not necessary to regularly check the fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluidwon’t correct a leak.

The clutch and brake master cylinder use the samereservoir.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

5-26

When to Check and What to Use

Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determinehow often you shouldcheck the fluid level in yourmaster cylinder reservoirand for the properfluid. See Part B: OwnerChecks and Serviceson page 6-19 and Part D:Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants onpage 6-26.

How to Check and Add FluidCheck to make sure that the fluid level is at or abovethe MIN mark. If the level is below the MIN mark,see the instructions on the reservoir cap.

Engine CoolantThe following explains your cooling system and how toadd coolant when it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, see Engine Overheating onpage 5-30.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and the propercoolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (− 37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

5-27

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half half coolant that meets GMSpecification 1825-M, which won’t damage aluminumparts. You can also use a recycled coolant conforming toGM Specification 1825-M with a complete coolantflush and refill. If you use this coolant mixture, you don’tneed to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and the proper coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’thave to add extra inhibitors or additives which claimto improve the system. These can be harmful.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on alevel surface. When yourengine is cold, thecoolant level should be atLOW, or a little higher.When your engine is warm,the level should be up toFULL, or a little higher.

5-28

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the proper coolantmixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be careful notto spill it.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burn youbadly. With the coolant recovery tank, you willalmost never have to add coolant at theradiator. Never turn the radiator pressurecap — even a little — when the engine andradiator are hot.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. Forinformation on how to add coolant to the radiator,see Cooling System on page 5-32.

Radiator Pressure CapNotice: Your radiator cap is a 15.6 psi (110 kPa)pressure-type cap and must be tightly installedto prevent coolant loss and possible engine damagefrom overheating. Be sure the arrows on the capline up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12for more information on location.

5-29

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 3-33.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood. Stayaway from the engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it. Just turn it off and geteveryone away from the vehicle until it coolsdown. Wait until there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

5-30

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but see or hearno steam, the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let theengine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the window as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drivenormally.

If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pullover, stop, and park your vehicle right away.

If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the enginefor three minutes while you’re parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

5-31

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s whatyou’ll see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FanB. Engine Coolant Recovery TankC. Radiator Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hoodcan start up even when the engine is notrunning and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

5-32

The coolant level shouldbe at or above the FULLmark. If it isn’t, youmay have a leak at thepressure cap or inthe radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, waterpump or somewhere elsein the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. Ifyou do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If yourun the engine, it could lose all coolant. Thatcould cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drive thevehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, checkto see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. Ifthe engine is overheating, the fan should be running. Ifit isn’t, your vehicle needs service.

Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.

5-33

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery TankIf you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant levelisn’t at or above the FULL mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water and a proper coolant atthe coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-27 for more information about the proper coolantmixture.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and a proper coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.

5-34

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at theFULL mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there’s one morething you can try. You can add the proper coolantmixture directly to the radiator but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if you turn the radiatorpressure cap -- even a little -- they can come

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

out at high speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiator pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system andradiator pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

5-35

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap whenthe cooling system, including the radiator pressurecap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise untilit first stops. (Don’t press down while turning thepressure cap.)If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now pushdown as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

3. Fill the radiator with the proper coolant mixture, upto the base of the filler neck. See Engine Coolanton page 5-27 for more information about the propercoolant mixture.

5-36

4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to theFULL mark.

5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel theupper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiatorfiller neck may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper coolant mixture through thefiller neck until the level reaches the base of thefiller neck.

8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time duringthis procedure if coolant begins to flow out of thefiller neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be surethe ears on the pressure cap are in line with thevent tube.

5-37

Power Steering Fluid

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

The power steering fluidreservoir is located in theengine compartmenton the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for reservoirlocation.

How to Check Power Steering FluidYou can check your fluid without taking the cap off. Justlook at the reservoir.

• When the engine compartment is hot, the levelshould be between the HOT marks.

• When the engine compartment is cool, the levelshould be between the COLD marks.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-26.

Notice: When adding power steering fluid ormaking a complete fluid change, always use theproper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid cancause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

5-38

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoirlocation.

Adding Washer Fluid

The low windshield washerfluid level warning light willcome on when the fluidlevel is too low. SeeLow Washer Fluid WarningLight on page 3-39.

The windshield washerfluid reservoir is located inthe engine compartmenton the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle.

Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Addwasher fluid until the tank is full.

Canada Only

5-39

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid,follow the manufacturer’s instructions foradding water.

• Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water doesn’tclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quartersfull when it’s very cold. This allows forexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage yourwasher system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinderreservoir is filled withDOT-3 brake fluid. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down. The first is that thebrake fluid goes down to an acceptable level duringnormal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,the fluid level goes back up. The other reason isthat fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, youshould have your brake system fixed, since a leakmeans that sooner or later your brakes will not workwell, or will not work at all.

5-40

So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluidwhen your linings are worn, then you will have toomuch fluid when you get new brake linings. You shouldadd (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill onthe engine. The fluid will burn if the engine ishot enough. You or others could be burned,and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brakefluid only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brakewarning light will come on. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-31.

United States Canada

5-41

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed containeronly. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-26.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This will helpkeep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakesystem parts. For example, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in yourbrake system can damage brake systemparts so badly that they will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put in the wrong kind offluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. Ifyou do, wash it off immediately. See AppearanceCare on page 5-89.

5-42

Brake WearThe GT series has four-wheel disc brakes. All othermodels have front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that makea high-pitched warning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed. The soundmay come and go or be heard all the time your vehicleis moving (except when you are pushing on thebrake pedal firmly).

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hear thebrake wear warning sound, have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withyour brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to GM torque specifications.

If you have rear drum brakes, they do not have wearindicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbingnoise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.Also, the rear brake drums should be removed andinspected each time the tires are removed for rotation orchanging. When you have the front brake padsreplaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

See Brake System Inspection on page 6-25.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not return tonormal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a moderate brake stop, your discbrakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderateor heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjustcorrectly. If you drive in that way, then — verycarefully — make a few moderate brake stops aboutevery 1,000 miles (1 600 km), so your brakes willadjust properly.

5-43

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Yourvehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GMbrake parts. When you replace parts of your brakingsystem — for example, when your brake liningswear down and you need new ones put in — be sureyou get new approved GM replacement parts. If you donot, your brakes may no longer work properly. Forexample, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrongfor your vehicle, the balance between your front andrear brakes can change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect can changein many other ways if someone puts in the wrongreplacement brake parts.

BatteryYour new vehicle comes with a maintenance freeACDelco® battery. When it’s time for a new battery, getone that has the replacement number shown on theoriginal battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

battery. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

Vehicle StorageIf you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days ormore, remove the black, negative (−) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep your battery fromrunning down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youare not careful. See Jump Starting onpage 5-45 for tips on working around a batterywithout getting hurt.

Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare yourvehicle for longer storage periods.

5-44

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, someor all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling itwon’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, both vehicles can bedamaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able tostart your vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put an automatictransaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle inneutral before setting the parking brake.

5-45

Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badlydamaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter. Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren’tneeded. This will avoid sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it could save your radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find thepositive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations oneach vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doingthis, and some have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. Youdon’t need to add water to the battery installedin your new vehicle. But if a battery has fillercaps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.If it is low, add water to take care of that first.If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flush the place withwater and get medical help immediately.

5-46

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle with the deadbattery has one.Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you’llget a short that would damage the battery andmaybe other parts, too. And don’t connectthe negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminalon the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-47

7. Don’t let the other endtouch metal. Connect itto the positive (+)terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminalif the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable tothe negative terminal ofthe good battery.Use a remotenegative (−) terminalif the vehicle has one.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the nextstep. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

5-48

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that has the dead battery. Ifit won’t start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result fromelectrical shorting if jumper cables are removedincorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take carethat the cables don’t touch each other or anyother metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty.

5-49

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine PartB. Good BatteryC. Dead Battery

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-50

All-Wheel DriveIf you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure toperform the lubricant checks described in this section.However, it has two additional systems that needlubrication.

Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)When to Check LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine howoften to check the lubricant. See Part C: PeriodicMaintenance Inspections on page 6-24.

How to Check LubricantTo get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricantto raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of lubricant to use. See Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-26.

Carrier Assembly-Differential(Rear Drive Module)

When to Check and Change LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine howoften to check the lubricant and when to change it. SeePart A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4.

How to Check LubricantTo get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricantto raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have itrepaired, if needed.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of lubricant to use. See Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-26.

5-51

Bulb ReplacementFor any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer. For the type of bulb to use,see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-59.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas insideand can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.You or others could be injured. Be sure to readand follow the instructions on the bulbpackage.

Headlamps

A. HeadlampB. Turn Signal Lamp

5-52

To replace the headlamp bulb, do the following:

1. Open the hood and locate the lamp assembly.

2. Remove the rubber cover and socket from theheadlamp.

5-53

3. Release the retainer clip holding the bulb bypressing down and moving the metal retainer awayfrom you.

4. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.

5. Reverse the steps to install a new bulb.

Front Turn Signal LampsTo replace the front turn signal lamp bulbs, do thefollowing:

1. See Headlamps on page 5-52.

2. Locate the turn signal bulb.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull itout of the lamp housing.

4. Reverse the steps to install a new bulb.

5-54

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)To replace the center high-mounted stoplamp bulb, dothe following:

1. The bulb is located on the inside of the liftgateliftglass near the top. Remove the two clips onboth sides of the cover and remove it.

2. Unscrew the two screws from the CHMSL housingand remove the housing to expose the bulb.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull itout of the lamp housing.

5-55

4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

5. Reverse the previous steps to install a new bulb.

Rear Combination LampsTo replace the turn signal and brake lamp bulbs, do thefollowing:

A. Brake LampB. Turn Signal Lamp

5-56

1. Remove the storage compartment cover in the rearcargo area of the vehicle to access the bulbs.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise andpull it out of thelamp housing.

5-57

3. Pull the bulb straightout of the socket.

4. Reverse the previous steps to install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the cover.

Back-Up Lamps

The back-up lamp bulb islocated below the rearcombination lamps.

To replace the back-up lamp bulb, do the following:

1. Reach up under therear fascia to locate theback-up lamphousing.

5-58

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise andpull it out of thelamp housing.

3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Reverse the previous steps to install a new bulb.

Replacement BulbsLamps Bulb Number

Headlamp High-/Low-Beam 9003Front Turn Signal 1157NABrake Lamp 7443Back-Up Lamps 7440Rear Turn Signal 7440CHMSL 921

5-59

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected at leasttwice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper BladeCheck” under At Least Twice a Year on page 6-20 formore information.

Replacement blades come in different types and areremoved in different ways. Here’s how to removethe wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assemblytoward the driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

5-60

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questionsabout your tire warranty and where to obtain service,see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additionalinformation refer to the tire manufacturer’s bookletincluded with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual and otherglove compartment literature.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out and aserious accident. See “Loading YourVehicle” in the Index.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your tires are cold.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

5-61

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into it’ssidewall. The following illustration shows an example ofa passenger car tire sidewall.

5-62

A. Tire SizeB. Department of Transportation (DOT)C. Tire Identification Number (TIN)D. Tire Ply MaterialE. Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)F. Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit

Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters andnumbers used to define a particular tire’s width,height, aspect ratio, construction type and servicedescription. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

Department of Transportation (DOT): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters andnumbers following DOT code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire.

Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of pliesin the sidewall and under the tread.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based onthree performance factors: treadwear, traction andtemperature resistance. For more information seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72.

Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load. For information onrecommended tire pressure see Inflation — TirePressure on page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-32.

5-63

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of a typicalpassenger car tire size.

A. Passenger (P-Metric) TireB. Tire WidthC. Aspect RatioD. Belt RatingE. Rim DiameterF. Load RangeG. Speed Rating

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as thefirst character in the tire size means a passenger vehicletire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire andRim Association.

Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tiresection width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements. For example, if thetire size aspect ratio is “70,” as shown in item “C” of theillustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is70% as high as it is wide.

Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire. The letter “R” meansradial ply construction; the letter “D” means diagonal orbias ply construction; and the letter “B” meansbelted-bias ply construction.

Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

Load Range: The load range represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry.

Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a tireis certified to carry a load. Speed ratings rangefrom “A” to “Z”.

5-64

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressureis expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weightof optional accessories, for example, automatictransmission, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, radio and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height toits width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may be madefrom steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires that hold thetire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laid at alternate anglessubstantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure ina tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascal (kPa), before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation -- Tire Pressure on page 5-67.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT code includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which canalso identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-32.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the frontaxle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light dutytrucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

5-65

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity ofa tire.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire atthe maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;and production options weight.

Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Themaximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire maybe inflated.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that faces outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand and or model name molding that ishigher or deeper than the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passengercars and some light duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressureshown on the tire placard. See Inflation -- Tire Pressureon page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laid at substantially90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and tubeassembly upon which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread andthe bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to atire indicating the maximum speed at which a tirecan operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the roadsurface. The amount of grip provided.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tirewhen only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When ItIs Time for New Tires on page 5-70.

5-66

Tread Width: The width of the tire’s tread.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tireinformation system that provides consumers withratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings are moldedinto the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-72.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Is the number of designatedseating positions multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg)plus the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-32

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,occupant weight and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to avehicle showing original equipment tire size andthe recommended cold inflation pressure. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-32.

Inflation — Tire PressureThe tire and loading information label, shows the correctinflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflationor overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tiresdon’t have enough air (underinflation), you can getthe following:

• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Bad wear

• Bad handling

• Bad fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), youcan get the following:

• Unusual wear

• Bad handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

5-67

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should beat 60 psi (420 kPa).

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflatedsimply by looking at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they’re underinflated.

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Pressthe tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matchesthe recommended pressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no further adjustment is necessary. Ifthe inflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on themetal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt andmoisture.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires assoon as possible and check wheel alignment. Alsocheck for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 5-70 and Wheel Replacementon page 5-74 for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotationis the most important. See Part A: ScheduledMaintenance Services on page 6-4 for scheduledrotation intervals.

5-68

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Tires should only be moved from front to rear and rearto front on the same side of the vehicle.

Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front andrear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-101.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a FlatTire” in the Index.

5-69

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’stime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage thatcan’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

5-70

Buying New TiresTo find out what kind and size of tires you need, lookat the tire and loading information label. For moreinformation about this label and where to find it, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

Make sure the replacements are the same size,load capacity, speed rating and construction type(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizesor types (radial and bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires of differentsizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

Be sure to use the same size and type tires onall wheels. It’s all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, it was developedfor use on your vehicle. See “Compact SpareTire” in the index.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

5-71

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable on thetire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximumselection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the Unites States National Highway TrafficSafety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear,traction and temperature performance. (This appliesonly to vehicles sold in the United States.) The gradesare molded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does notapply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saveror temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rimdiameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passengercars and light trucks may vary with respect to thesegrades, they must also conform to federal safetyrequirements.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course asa tire graded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction — AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance. Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

5-72

Temperature — A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generationof heat and its ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing arenot needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear oryour vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignmentmay need to be reset. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheelsmay need to be rebalanced.

5-73

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could beinjured. Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chainclearance to the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-77 for moreinformation.

5-74

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor how far it’s been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire ChainsNotice: Use tire chains only where legal and onlywhen you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chainsthat are the proper size for your tires. Install themon the front tires for front-wheel-drive vehicles.If your vehicle has all-wheel-drive, install thetire chains on the front or all four tires but never onthe rear tires only. Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. If you can hear the chains contactingyour vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Driving toofast or spinning the wheels with chains on willdamage your vehicle.

5-75

If a Tire Goes FlatIt’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goesout of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a fewtips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you’d usein a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control bysteering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerous withoutthe appropriate safety equipment and training.The jack provided with your vehicle isdesigned only for changing a flat tire. If it isused for anything else, you or others could bebadly injured or killed if the vehicle slips offthe jack. Use the jack provided with yourvehicle only for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use yourjacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-76

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on yourhazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can cause an injury. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll over youor other people. You and they could be badlyinjured. Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever inPARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle toFIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

3. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain the vehicle won’tmove, you can put blocks at the front and rearof the tire farthest away from the one beingchanged. That would be the tire on the otherside of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack andchange a tire.

5-77

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe jack, wheel wrench, jack handle and spare tire arestowed in the rear of the vehicle, underneath thefloor of the cargo area. To remove the spare tire andtools do the following:

1. Turn the two lockknobs on the floor ofthe cargo area toUNLOCK.

2. Lift up the cargo area floor panel, remove the hookattached to the bottom side of the panel and hook itover the weatherstripping.

5-78

Notice: Make sure to place the hook in the properlocation in order to avoid damaging the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the hook when finished and placeit back in its original position before closing theliftgate.

3. Remove the jack from the tray on the right side ofthe compartment and the jack handle and wheelwrench from the top side of the compartment.

4. Unscrew the center retaining nut and lift up theplastic tray to expose the compact spare tire.

5. Unscrew the center bolt from the compact spare tireand pull out the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 5-88 for more information aboutthe compact spare tire.

5-79

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), jackhandle (B) and wheel wrench (C).

6. Attach the jack handle to the jack.

7. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the lift head.

Removing the Flat Tire and Installingthe Spare Tire

1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.Don’t remove them yet.

5-80

2. Position the jack and raise the jack lift head to fitover the car flange between the two notches.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack youcould be badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it is supported only bya jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit thejack lift head into the proper location beforeraising the vehicle.

5-81

3. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off theground so there is enough room for the compactspare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.

4. Remove all the wheelnuts and take off theflat tire.

5. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

5-82

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromthe places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. Ifyou do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheelcould fall off, causing a serious accident.

6. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end ofthe nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut byhand until the wheel is held against the hub.

5-83

7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

8. Tighten the wheel nutsfirmly in a crisscrosssequence as shown.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to come looseand even come off. This could lead to anaccident. Be sure to use the correct wheelnuts. If you have to replace them, be sure toget new GM original equipment wheel nuts.Stop somewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench to theproper torque specification. See “Capacitiesand Specifications” in the Index for wheel nuttorque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification. See “Capacities andSpecifications” in the index for the wheel nut torquespecification.

5-84

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place.

Return the jack, jack handle and wheel wrench to thestorage area. The compact spare tire storage areais designed only for the compact spare tire, the standardtire cannot be stored there.

To store the flat tire do the following:

1. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove thecenter wheel cap before storing the flat tire.

2. Place the flat tire on the rear cargo area floor panelwith the outer side of the wheel facing up.

3. Use the tire tie-down belts located under the floorpanel to secure the flat tire.

4. Hook the belts (end closest to the buckle) to therear, upper tie-down hooks.

5-85

5. Pass the belts through the center hole of the wheel.

6. Attach the other end of the belts to the rear,lower tie-down hooks.

7. Position the tire edge against the rear center end ofthe floor panel. Pull the end of the belts to makesure the tire is secure.

5-86

Storing the Spare Tire and Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place.

A. JackB. Wheel WrenchC. Bolt

D. Spare TireE. Jack HandleF. Nut

Return the jack, jack handle, wheel wrench and compactspare tire to the storage area. When storing thecompact spare tire, put it in place with the inner side ofthe wheel facing up. The compact spare tire storagearea is designed only for the compact spare tire,the standard tire cannot be stored there.

5-87

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflated whenyour vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, youshould stop as soon as possible and make sureyour spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 50 mph(80 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), soyou can finish your trip and have your full-size tirerepaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s bestto replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon asyou can. Your spare will last longer and be in goodshape in case you need it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’ttake your vehicle through an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compact spare can get caughton the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel withother wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.Using them can damage your vehicle and candamage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains onyour compact spare.

5-88

Appearance CareRemember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Someare toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike amatch or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some aredangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closedspace. When you use anything from a container to cleanyour vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’swarnings and instructions. And always open your doorsor windows when you are cleaning the inside.

Never use these to clean your vehicle:

• Gasoline

• Benzene

• Naphtha

• Carbon Tetrachloride

• Acetone

• Paint Thinner

• Turpentine

• Lacquer Thinner

• Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous — some more thanothers — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

Do not use any of these unless this manual says youcan. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

• Alcohol

• Laundry Soap

• Bleach

• Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust andloose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and paintedsurfaces with a clean, damp cloth.

Cleaning Fabric/CarpetYour dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabricand carpet. They will clean normal spots and stainsvery well.

You can get GM-approved cleaning products from yourdealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials onpage 5-95.

5-89

Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

• Clean up stains as soon as you can — beforethey set.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a cleanarea often. A soft brush may be used if stains arestubborn.

• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, cleanthe entire area immediately or it will set.

Using Cleaner on Fabric1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any

loose dirt.

2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Masksurrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.

3. Follow the directions on the container label.

4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturatethe material and do not rub it roughly.

5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use asponge to remove any excess cleaner.

6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampenedtowel or cloth.

7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

Special Fabric Cleaning ProblemsStains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urineand blood can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge thesoiled area with cool water.

2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaning instructionsdescribed earlier.

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treatthe area with a water and baking soda solution:1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)of lukewarm water.

4. Let dry.

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chilisauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.

3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructionsdescribed earlier.

5-90

Cleaning VinylUse warm water and a clean cloth.

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. Youmay have to do this more than once.

• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain ifyou do not get them off quickly. Use a clean clothand vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Cleaning LeatherUse a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap orsaddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, letthe leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.

• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

• Soiled or stained leather should be cleanedimmediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,it can harm the leather.

Cleaning the Top of the InstrumentPanelUse only mild soap and water to clean the top surfacesof the instrument panel. Sprays containing siliconesor waxes may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Cleaning Interior Plastic ComponentsUse only a mild soap and water solution on a soft clothor sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect thesurface finish.

Cleaning Glass SurfacesGlass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or aliquid household glass cleaner will remove normaltobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-95.

Notice: Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass,because they may cause scratches. Avoid placingdecals on the inside rear window, since theymay have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleanersare used on the inside of the rear window, anelectric defogger element may be damaged. Anytemporary license should not be attached across thedefogger grid.

5-91

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at leastevery six months. During very cold, damp weathermore frequent application may be required. SeePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-26.

Cleaning the Outside of YourVehicleThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depthof color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish isto keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehiclewell, removing all soap residue completely. You can getGM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-95.Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on thesurface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enteryour vehicle.

5-92

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and acar washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue from thepaint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning productsfrom your dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 5-95.

If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydull the finish or leave swirl marks.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remainon painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as

possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners thatare marked safe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. You can help to keep the paint finishlooking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Windshield, Backglass and WiperBladesIf the windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,wax, sap or other material may be on the blade orwindshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strengthglass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads donot form when you rinse it with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper bladesand affect their performance. Clean the blade bywiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strengthwindshield washer solvent. Then rinse the bladewith water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;replace blades that look worn.

5-93

Aluminum WheelsKeep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth withmild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because you could damage the surface. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Thesebrushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always takecare to wipe off any overspray or splash from allpainted surfaces on the body or wheels of thevehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage thepaint finish and tires.

Sheet Metal DamageIf your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into major repairexpense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas offinish damage can be corrected in your dealer’sbody and paint shop.

5-94

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan andexhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damagecan take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsSee your GM dealer for more information on purchasingthe following products.

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsDescription Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil andasphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl CleanerCleans vinyl tops,upholstery andconvertible tops.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

5-95

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Swirl Remover Polish

Removes swirl marks,fine scratches and otherlight surfacecontamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor Eliminator

Odorless spray odoreliminator used onfabrics, vinyl, leather andcarpet.

See your General Motors parts department for theseproducts. See Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-26.

5-96

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver’s side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. Thiscode will help you identify your engine, specificationsand replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou’ll find this label on your spare tire cover. It’s veryhelpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:

• your VIN,

• the model designation,

• paint information and

• a list of all production options and specialequipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Don’t add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicleand the damage wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Some add-on electrical equipment cankeep other components from working as theyshould.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto add anything electrical to your vehicle, seeServicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56.

5-97

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker.An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on andoff, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,have your headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuitbreaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavysnow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows and otherpower accessories. When the current load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting thecircuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by fuses, circuit breakers and fusiblethermal links in the wiring itself. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of thecorrect size.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t havea spare fuse, you can borrow one. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you can get alongwithout – like the radio or air conditioner – and use itsfuse, if it is of the value you need. Replace it as soon asyou can.

Before replacing a fuse, turn every electrical switch off.

5-98

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The instrument panel fuse block is located underneaththe instrument panel on the driver’s side of thevehicle.

Fuses Usage

TAILFront Parking Lamps, Taillamps,License Plate Lamps, InstrumentPanel Lights, Engine Control System

OBD On-Board Diagnostic SystemWIPER Windshield Wipers

AM2 Charging System, Air Bag System,Starter System, Engine Control

Fuses Usage

STOPStop Lamps, CHMSL, EngineControl System, Anti-lock Brakes,Cruise Control

DOOR Power Door Locks, Liftglass Lock

AM1 Cigarette Lighter, Gauge, ECU-IG,Wiper, Rear Wiper, Washer Fuses

ECU-IG

Cruise Control, Anti-Lock Brakes,Theft Deterrent System, AutomaticTransaxle Control System, ElectricCooling Fan

RR WIPER Rear Window Wiper, Rear WindowDefogger

A/C Air ConditioningINV Power OutletsP/POINT Power OutletsECU-B Daytime Running Lamps

CIG

Cigarette Lighter, Power RearviewMirrors, Power Outlets, AudioSystem, Automatic TransaxleControl System

GAUGE

Gauges and Meters, Back-UpLamps, Charging System, PowerDoor Locks, Power Windows,Sunroof, Air Conditioning, CruiseControl

WASHER Windshield Washers*1 Engine Control System

5-99

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

This engine compartment fuse block is located in theengine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehiclenear the air cleaner. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

Fuses Usage

HEAD MAIN Right Headlamp, Left HeadlampFuses

ALT-S Charging SystemEFI Electronic Fuel Injection System

HAZARD Turn Signal Lamps, EmergencyFlasher

HORN Horn

DOMEInterior Lights, Gauges and Meters,Audio System, Remote KeylessEntry System

Fuses UsageMAIN Starter System, AM2 FuseAMP Audio AmplifiersMAYDAY Not UsedSPARE Spare FuseSPARE Spare FuseSPARE Spare FuseABS NO. 2 Anti-lock Brake SystemRDI FAN Electronic Cooling Fan SystemABS NO. 1 Anti-lock Brake System

ALT

Charging System, DEFOG,HEATER, GAUGE, ECU-IG,WIPER, RR WIP, WASHER, ABSNO. 1, ABS NO. 2, RDI FAN, FOG,GAUGE, INV, AM1 Fuses

HEAD RH Right-hand HeadlampHEAD LH Left-hand HeadlampFOG Front Fog Lamps

Relays UsageDIMMER Headlamp DimmerFAN NO. 2 Cooling Fan SystemFAN NO. 1 Cooling Fan SystemEFI Electronic Fuel Injection System

5-100

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.

ApplicationCapacities

English MetricAir Conditioning Refrigerant R134a 1.41 lbs 0.64 kg

Automatic Transaxle1.8L Engine (Code 8)1.8L Engine (Code 8) with AWD1.8L Engine (Code L)

3.2 quarts3.1 quarts4.3 quarts

3.0 L2.9 L4.1 L

Cooling System1.8L Engine (Code 8)1.8L H.O. Engine (Code L)

6.9 quarts7.1 quarts

6.5 L6.7 L

Engine Oil with Filter1.8L Engine (Code 8)1.8L Engine (Code L)

3.9 quarts4.8 quarts

3.7 L4.4 L

Fuel TankWith AWDWithout AWD

11.9 gallons13.2 gallons

45.0 L50.0 L

5-101

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Manual TransaxleFive-SpeedSix-Speed

2.0 quarts2.4 quarts

1.9 L2.3 L

Rear Differential 0.5 quarts 0.5 LTransfer Case 0.8 quarts 0.8 L

Wheels and TiresWheel Nut Torque

76 lb-ft 103Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-26.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

L41.8L Engine 8 Automatic and Manual 0.043 inch (1.1 mm)

L41.8L H.O. DOHC Engine L Automatic and Manual 0.043 inch (1.1 mm)

5-102

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsPart Number

Battery ACDelco® Part No. 19001602Engine Air Cleaner/Filter GM Part No. 88969107

Engine Oil FilterEngine Oil Filter (Code 8)Engine Oil Filter (Code L)

GM Part No. 88971573GM Part No. 88969580

Passenger Compartment Air Filter GM Part No. 88970273

PCV ValvePCV Valve (Code 8 base model)PCV Valve (Code 8 AWD Model)PCV Valve (Code L)

GM Part No. 94859406GM Part No. 94859404GM Part No. 88969512

Spark Plugs1.8 L Engine (Code 8)1.8 L Engine (Code L)

DENSO SK16R11, NGK IFR5A11or GM Part No. 94859448

DENSO SK20R11,NGK IFR6A11 or

GM Part No. 88969637*Your engine is fitted with iridium-tipped spark plugs. Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs for better engineperformance.

5-103

✍ NOTES

5-104

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2How This Section is Organized .........................6-3Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-4Selecting the Right Schedule ...........................6-5Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..............6-7Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ......6-14Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-19At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-19At Least Once a Month .................................6-19

At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-20At Least Once a Year ...................................6-21Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-24Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle

Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-24Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-24Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-24Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-25Throttle System Inspection .............................6-25Brake System Inspection ................................6-25Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-26Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-28

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealerfor details.

Maintenance RequirementsMaintenance intervals, checks, inspections andrecommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in thismanual are necessary to keep your vehicle in goodworking condition. Any damage caused by failureto follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered bywarranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. Improper vehicle maintenance caneven affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improperfluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increasethe level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protectour environment, and to keep your vehicle in goodcondition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

6-2

How This Section is OrganizedThis maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explainswhat to have done and how often. Some of theseservices can be complex, so unless you are technicallyqualified and have the necessary equipment, you shouldlet your GM dealer’s service department do these jobs.

Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported servicepeople that will perform the work using genuine GM parts.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle canbe dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, youcan be seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper tools andequipment for the job. If you have any doubt,have a qualified technician do the work.

If you want to get the service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you whatshould be checked and when. It also explains whatyou can easily do to help keep your vehicle in goodcondition.

“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explainsimportant inspections that your dealer’s servicedepartment can perform for you.

“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” listssome recommended products necessary to helpkeep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,or their equivalents, should be used whether you dothe work yourself or have it done.

“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you torecord and keep track of the maintenance performed onyour vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. Theymay be needed to qualify your vehicle for warrantyrepairs.

6-3

Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServicesIn this part are scheduled maintenance services whichare to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.

Using Your Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in goodworking condition. But we don’t know exactly howyou’ll drive it. You may drive short distances only a fewtimes a week. Or you may drive long distances allthe time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use yourvehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands or in many other ways.

Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,maintenance needs may vary. You may need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please read thefollowing and note how you drive. If you havequestions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,see your dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services you shouldhave done and when to schedule them.

When you go to your dealer for your service needs,you’ll know that GM-trained and supported servicepeople will perform the work using genuine GM parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed inPart D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle usesthese. All parts should be replaced and all necessaryrepairs done before you or anyone else drives thevehicle.

These schedules are for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits. You will find these on your vehicle’s tireand loading information label. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-32.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-4.

6-4

Selecting the Right ScheduleFirst you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules isright for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide whichschedule to follow:

Short Trip/City DefinitionFollow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if anyone of these conditions is true for your vehicle:

• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This isparticularly important when outside temperaturesare below freezing.

• Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequentdriving in stop-and-go traffic).

• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on topof your vehicle.

• If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,taxi or other commercial application.

One of the reasons you should follow this schedule ifyou operate your vehicle under any of these conditionsis that these conditions cause engine oil to breakdown sooner.

Short Trip/City Intervals

Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and FilterChange (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).

Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation. EngineAir Cleaner Filter Inspection, if driving in dustyconditions.

Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): PassengerCompartment Air Filter Replacement. Transfer CaseFluid Change (when trailer towing). Rear DifferentialFluid Change (when trailer towing).

Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air CleanerFilter Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap, Cap Gasket andLines Inspection (or every 24 months, whichever occursfirst). Automatic Transaxle Check. Manual TransaxleFluid Change (severe conditions only) (or every24 months, whichever occurs first). Cooling SystemService (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first).

Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Automatic TransaxleFluid Change (severe conditions only). Valve ClearanceInspection, adjust if necessary (or every 48 months,whichever occurs first).

6-5

At 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Or 48 Months,Whichever Occurs First) — Then Every 15,000 Miles(25 000 km) (or 12 Months, Whichever OccursFirst): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.

Every 120,000 Miles (200 000 km): Spark PlugReplacement.

These intervals only summarize maintenance services.Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenanceon the following pages.

Long Trip/Highway DefinitionFollow this scheduled maintenance only if none of theconditions from the Short Trip/City ScheduledMaintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if thevehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty areaor used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/Cityschedule for these conditions

Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine underhighway conditions will cause engine oil to break downslower.

Long Trip/Highway Intervals

Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and FilterChange (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). Tire Rotation.

Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): PassengerCompartment Air Filter Replacement.

Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air CleanerFilter Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap, Cap Gasket andLines Inspection (or every 24 months, whichever occursfirst). Automatic Transaxle Fluid Check. ManualTransaxle Fluid Change (severe conditions only) (orevery 24 months, whichever occurs first). Cooling SystemService (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first).

Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Automatic TransaxleFluid Change (severe conditions only). Valve ClearanceInspection, adjust if necessary (or every 48 months,whichever occurs first).

At 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (or 48 Months,Whichever Occurs First) — Then Every 15,000 Miles(25 000 km) (or 12 Months, Whichever OccursFirst): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.

Every 120,000 Miles (200 000 km): Spark PlugReplacement.

These intervals only summarize maintenance services.Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenanceon the following pages.

6-6

Short Trip/City ScheduledMaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life ofthis vehicle. The service shown at 120,000 miles(200 000 km) should be repeated at the same intervalafter 120,000 miles (200 000 km) for the life of thisvehicle.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-19and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections onpage 6-24.

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or limit recall liability prior tothe completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

+A good time to check your brakes is during tirerotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-25.

3,000 Miles (5 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

6,000 Miles (10 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

9,000 Miles (15 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

12,000 Miles (20 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

6-7

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent

trailer towing.❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent

trailer towing.

18,000 Miles (30 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving industy conditions. Replace filter if necessary. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

21,000 Miles (35 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

24,000 Miles (40 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving industy conditions. Replace filter if necessary. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

27,000 Miles (45 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

6-8

30,000 Miles (50 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for

damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). Replace parts as needed. An EmissionControl Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every24 months, whichever occurs first). See EngineCoolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles(50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow atrailer.

❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid.❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent

trailer towing.❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent

trailer towing.

33,000 Miles (55 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

36,000 Miles (60 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

6-9

39,000 Miles (65 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

42,000 Miles (70 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid.❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent

trailer towing.❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent

trailer towing.

48,000 Miles (80 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

51,000 Miles (85 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

54,000 Miles (90 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

57,000 Miles (95 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

6-10

60,000 Miles (100 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every

48 months, whichever occurs first). An EmissionControl Service.

❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months,whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect for tappet noise and engine vibration. Adjustvalve clearance to factory specifications if necessary(or every 48 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.

❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines fordamage or leaks (or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). Replace parts as needed. An EmissionControl Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every24 months, whichever occurs first). See EngineCoolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles(50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow atrailer.

❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid every 60,000 miles(100 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven underone or more of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery

service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, check the fluid. See Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-26 for the properfluid to use.❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent

trailer towing.❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent

trailer towing.

63,000 Miles (105 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

6-11

66,000 Miles (110 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving industy conditions. Replace filter if necessary. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

69,000 Miles (115 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

72,000 Miles (120 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

75,000 Miles (125 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or 12 months

since last inspection). An Emission Control Service.❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent trailer

towing.❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent

trailer towing.

78,000 Miles (130 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

81,000 Miles (135 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

6-12

84,000 Miles (140 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving industy conditions. Replace filter if necessary. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

87,000 Miles (145 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every

12 months since last inspection). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months,whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines fordamage or leaks (or every 24 months whicheveroccurs first). Replace parts as needed. An EmissionControl Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every24 months, whichever occurs first). See EngineCoolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles(50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow atrailer.

❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid.❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent

trailer towing.❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent

trailer towing.

6-13

93,000 Miles (155 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

96,000 Miles (160 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving industy conditions. Replace filter if necessary. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

99,000 Miles (165 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

120,000 Miles (200 000 km)❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.

Long Trip/Highway ScheduledMaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life ofthis vehicle. The services shown at 120,000 miles(200 000 km) should be repeated at the same intervalafter 120,000 miles (200 000 km) for the life of thisvehicle.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-19and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections onpage 6-24.

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or limit recall liability prior tothe completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

+A good time to check your brakes is during tirerotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-25.

6-14

7,500 Miles (12 500 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on

page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

22,500 Miles (37 500 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

30,000 Miles (50 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on

page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. An EmissionControl Service.

❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines fordamage or leaks (or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). Replace parts as needed. An EmissionControl Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every24 months, whichever occurs first). See EngineCoolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles(50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow atrailer.

❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid.

6-15

37,500 Miles (62 500 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on

page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

52,500 Miles (87 500 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

60,000 Miles (100 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on

page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every48 months, whichever occurs first). An EmissionControl Service.

❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months,whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines fordamage or leaks (or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). Replace parts as needed. An EmissionControl Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Inspect for tappet noise and engine vibration. Adjustvalve clearance to factory specifications if necessary(or every 48 months, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service.

❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every24 months, whichever occurs first). See EngineCoolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

6-16

❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles(50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow atrailer.

❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid every 60,000 miles(100 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven underone or more of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery

service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, check the fluid. See Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-26 for the properfluid to use.

67,500 Miles (112 500 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

75,000 Miles (125 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on

page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or 12 monthssince last inspection). An Emission Control Service.

82,500 Miles (137 500 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

6-17

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission

Control Service.❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for

damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). Replace parts as needed. An EmissionControl Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or 12 monthssince last inspection). An Emission Control Service.

❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every24 months, whichever occurs first). See EngineCoolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles(50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow atrailer.

❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on

page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

97,500 Miles (162 500 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)

120,000 Miles (200 000 km)❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.

6-18

Part B: Owner Checks and ServicesListed in this part are owner checks and serviceswhich should be performed at the intervals specified tohelp ensure the safety, dependability and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Part D.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important for you or a service station attendant toperform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for furtherdetails.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add the propercoolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-27 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-39 for furtherdetails.

Hood Latch Operation CheckPull the primary hood latch release handle inside thevehicle. The secondary latch should keep the hood fromopening all the way when the primary latch is released.Make sure the hood closes firmly. See Hood Releaseon page 5-10 for further details.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your tires and make sure tires areinflated to the correct pressures. Don’t forget to checkyour spare tire. See Tires on page 5-69 for furtherdetails.

6-19

At Least Twice a Year

Restraint System CheckMake sure the safety belt reminder light and all yourbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare working properly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts. If you see anythingthat might keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety beltsreplaced.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bagsystem does not need regular maintenance.)

Wiper Blade CheckInspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replaceblade inserts that appear worn or damaged or thatstreak or miss areas of the windshield. Also seeCleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-92.

Weatherstrip LubricationSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather more frequent application may berequired. See Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-26.

Fluid Level CheckCheck the power steering pump and automatic ormanual transaxle fluid levels and add as needed. SeePower Steering Fluid on page 5-38 and AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 5-23 or Manual Transaxle Fluidon page 5-25. Check for leaks. A fluid loss in thesesystems could indicate a problem. Have the systeminspected and repaired at once.

6-20

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders ServiceLubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricantspecified in Part D.

Seat Operation CheckMake sure the head restraints stay in position and allseat latches lock. Check that the recliner holds bypushing and pulling the seatback while it is reclined.

Body Lubrication ServiceLubricate all hood latch assembly, secondary latch,pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood and body doorhinges, rear compartment and any folding seathardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequentlubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment.

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If it does, you or otherscould be injured. Follow the steps below.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27 ifnecessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start theengine in each gear. The starter should work only inPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works inany other position, your vehicle needs service.On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever inNEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and tryto start the engine. The starter should work onlywhen the clutch is pushed down all the way to thefloor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t pushedall the way down, your vehicle needs service.

6-21

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If it does, you or otherscould be injured. Follow the steps below.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked on a levelsurface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-27 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position,but don’t start the engine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the shift lever outof PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.

• With an automatic transaxle, the key should turn toLOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).

• With a manual transaxle, the key should turn toLOCK only if you push the key in farther, whileturning it toward LOCK.

6-22

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others could beinjured and property could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of your vehicle incase it begins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Withthe engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),slowly remove foot pressure from the regularbrake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by theparking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Thenrelease the parking brake followed by the regularbrake.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

6-23

Part C: PeriodicMaintenance InspectionsListed in this part are inspections and services whichshould be performed at least twice a year (for instance,each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’sservice department do these jobs. Make sure anynecessary repairs are completed at once.

Proper procedures to perform these services may befound in a service manual. See Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-11.

Steering, Suspension and FrontDrive Axle Boot and Seal InspectionInspect the front and rear suspension and steeringsystem for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs ofwear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steeringlines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the driveaxle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replaceseals if necessary.

Exhaust System InspectionInspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the bodynear the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,holes, loose connections or other conditions whichcould cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could letexhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhauston page 2-33.

Fuel System InspectionInspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.

6-24

Engine Cooling System InspectionInspect the hoses and have them replaced if theyare cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean theoutside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test ofthe cooling system and pressure cap is recommendedat least once a year.

Throttle System InspectionInspect the throttle system for interference or binding,and for damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components that have higheffort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate acceleratorand cruise control cables.

Brake System InspectionInspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Also inspect drum brake liningsfor wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, includingdrums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to haveyour brakes inspected more often if your drivinghabits or conditions result in frequent braking.

6-25

Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber or specification may be obtained from yourdealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil onpage 5-16.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater (preferably distilled) and goodquality Ethylene Glycol BaseCoolant (GM Part No. U.S.12378560, in Canada 993089,or equivalent) conforming to GMSpecification 1825M or approvedrecycled coolant conforming to GMSpecification 1825M. See EngineCoolant on page 5-27.

Usage Fluid/LubricantHydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

HydraulicClutch System See “Hydraulic Brake System.”

WindshieldWasher Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

ManualTransaxle

GM Goodwrench Synthetic ManualTransmission Fluid (GM Part No.U.S. 12346190, in Canada10953477 — 1 quart) or SAE75W-90 GL-5 gear oil.

AutomaticTransaxle

Use only T-IV AutomaticTransmission Fluid (GM Part No.U.S. 88900925, in Canada22689186). See AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 5-23.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

6-26

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

ManualTransaxle ShiftLinkage

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 12377985, in Canada88901242) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, CategoryLB or GC-LB.

Clutch LinkagePivot Points

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 12377985, in Canada88901242) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, CategoryLB or GC-LB.

Floor ShiftLinkage

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2Category LB or GC-LB.

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 12377985, in Canada88901242) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, CategoryLB or GC-LB.

Rear Axle(All-WheelDrive)

Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.12345977, in Canada 10953482) orSAE 80W-90 GL-5 gear lubricant.

Usage Fluid/LubricantTransfer Case(All-WheelDrive)

Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.12345977, in Canada 10953482) orSAE 80W-90 GL-5 gear lubricant.

Hood LatchAssembly,SecondaryLatch, Pivots,Spring Anchorand ReleasePawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM PartNo. U.S. 12345579, in Canada992887).

6-27

Part E: Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service andany additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following recordpages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Record

6-28

Maintenance Record (cont’d)

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Record

6-29

Maintenance Record (cont’d)

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Record

6-30

Customer Assistance Information ......................7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-4Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4GM Mobility Program for Persons

with Disabilities ...........................................7-6Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-8

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..........................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors .........................................7-11Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

7-1

Customer AssistanceInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or the operation of your vehiclewill be resolved by your dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, contactthe Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GM of CanadaCustomer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order togive your inquiry prompt attention. Please have thefollowing information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available fromthe vehicle registration or title, or the plate at thetop left of the instrument panel and visible throughthe windshield.)

• Dealership name and location

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting Pontiac, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. Thatis why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.

7-2

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer arecommitted to making sure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in StepsOne and Two, you should file with the BBB Auto LineProgram to enforce any additional rights you may have.Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information booklet for information on theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better Business Bureausto settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Although you may be required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agreewith the decision given in your case, you may reject it andproceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at the followingaddress:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1804

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.

7-3

Online Owner CenterThe Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownershipneeds. You can find your specific vehicle informationall in one place.

The Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specific vehicle,including tips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner’s manual. (United States only)

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history andmaintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members. (United States only)

Refer to the web for updated information.

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.(United States) or My GM Canada withinwww.gmcanada.com (Canada).

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicatewith Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesPontiac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes towrite to Pontiac, the letter should be addressed toPontiac’s Customer Assistance Center.

United States – Customer AssistancePontiac-GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

1-800-762-2737 or1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

7-4

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada – Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas – Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) – Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

7-5

GM Mobility Program for Personswith Disabilities

This program, available toqualified applicants, canreimburse you up to$1,000 toward aftermarketdriver or passengeradaptive equipment youmay require for yourvehicle (hand controls,wheelchair/scooterlifts, etc.).

This program can also provide you with free resourceinformation, such as area driver assessment centers andmobility equipment installers. The program is availablefor a limited period of time from the date of vehiclepurchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or callthe GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY userscall 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance Program

Security While You Travel1-800-ROADSIDE (1-800-762-3743)

As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Pontiac RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as you drivein the city or travel the open road.

Pontiac’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number isstaffed by a team of technically trained advisors, whoare available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providingminor repair information over the phone or makingarrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearestPontiac dealer.

We will provide the following services for3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:

• Fuel delivery

• Lock-out service (identification required)

• Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service

• Change a flat tire

• Jump starts

7-6

We have quick, easy access to telephone numbersof the following additional services depending onyour needs:

• Hotels

• Glass replacement

• Tire repair facilities

• Rental vehicle or taxis

• Airports or train stations

• Police, fire departments or hospitals

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder Pontiac’s comprehensive warranty. However,when other services are utilized, our advisors will explainany payment obligations you might incur.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, pleaseprovide the following information to give the advisor:

• Location of vehicle

• Telephone number of your location

• Vehicle model, year and color

• Mileage of vehicle

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle license plate number

Pontiac reserves the right to limit services orreimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Pontiac’sjudgement, the claims become excessive in frequencyor type of occurrence.

While we hope you never have the occasion to use ourservice, it is added security while traveling for youand your family. Remember, we’re only a phone callaway. Pontiac Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDEor 1-800-762-3743, text telephone (TTY) users, call1-888-889-2438.

7-7

Canadian Roadside AssistanceVehicles purchased in Canada have an extensiveRoadside Assistance program accessible from anywherein Canada or the United States. Please refer to theWarranty and Owner Assistance Information book.

Courtesy TransportationPontiac has always exemplified quality and value in itsoffering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participating dealers areproud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customersupport program for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retailpurchase/lease customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation optionsare available when warranty repairs are required. This willreduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

Plan Ahead When PossibleWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, youshould contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advisingyour service consultant of your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, letthem know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicleoff for service, you are urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait Pontiachelps minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule. This includes a oneway shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles fromthe dealership.

7-8

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)may be available for the use of public transportationsuch as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative,reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to $10per day (five day maximum) may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costs and be supported byoriginal receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleWhen your vehicle is unavailable due to overnightwarranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide youwith a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for arental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to amaximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. Thisrequires that you sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state, local and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements, insurance coverage, creditcard, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges andmay also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completionof the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is notpart of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separatebooklet entitled Warranty and Owner AssistanceInformation furnished with each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participatingdealers and all program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangementswill be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the GeneralMotors of Canada New Vehicle Limited warranty,alternative transportation may be available under theCourtesy Transportation Program. Please consultyour dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to terms and conditions described hereinat its sole discretion.

7-9

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inthe Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of TransportationWashington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, you should immediately notifyTransport Canada, in addition to notifying GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada330 Sparks StreetTower COttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

7-10

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.Please call us at 1-800-762-2737, or write:

Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repair serviceprocedures, adjustments, and specifications for GMtransmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

7-11

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motors carsand trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to Product ServiceBulletins can be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner’s manual will includethe Maintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, andWarranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

Current and Past Model Order FormsService Publications are available for current andpast model GM vehicles. To request an order form,please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on theWorld Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP. O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

7-12

AAccessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-17Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-39Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-97Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ...... 3-45, 3-54Air Bag ......................................................... 3-30

Readiness Light .......................................... 3-30Air Bag System, Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) ............................................. 1-47Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-21All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-51All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ........................... 4-9Aluminum Wheels ........................................... 5-94AM ............................................................... 3-63Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-64Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System ...................................................... 3-64Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-32Anti-lock Brake System ..................................... 4-7Appearance Care ............................................ 5-89

Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-92Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-95Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-89

Appearance Care (cont.)Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-92Finish Damage ............................................ 5-94Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-94Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-95Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-95Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-92

Arming the System ......................................... 2-14Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-19Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-41

Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-64Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-64Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-64Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-63Radio with CD ............................................ 3-42Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-52Setting the Time .......................................... 3-41Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-63XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-64

Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-13Automatic Transaxle ........................................ 2-18

Fluid .......................................................... 5-23Operation ................................................... 2-20

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check ............................................. 6-22

1

BBacking Up .................................................... 4-38Battery .......................................................... 5-44Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-6Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-21Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-21Brake ............................................................ 2-27

Parking ...................................................... 2-27System Inspection ....................................... 6-25System Warning Light .................................. 3-31

Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-40Brake Wear ................................................... 5-43Brakes .......................................................... 5-40Braking ........................................................... 4-6Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-16Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-52

Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-58Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-55Front Turn Signal Lamps .............................. 5-54Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52Headlamps ................................................. 5-52Rear Combination Lamps ............................. 5-56Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-59

Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-71

CCalifornia Fuel .................................................. 5-5Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-5Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCanadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-8Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-101Carbon Monoxide ..................... 4-24, 4-34, 2-9, 2-33Care of ......................................................... 5-92

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-92Your CD Player ........................................... 3-64Your CDs ................................................... 3-64

Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-41Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-41Carrier Assembly-Differential

(Rear Drive Module) .................................... 5-51Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-37Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-55Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-75Charging System Light .................................... 3-31Check ........................................................... 3-34

Engine Light ............................................... 3-34Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-28Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-16Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-56Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-95

2

Child Restraints .............................................. 1-33Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-33Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-29Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-39Older Children ............................................. 1-27Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System ........................................ 1-41Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat

Position .................................................. 1-42Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position ........................................... 1-44Top Strap ................................................... 1-36Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-38Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-36

Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-19Cleaning ........................................................ 5-89

Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-89Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-92Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-95Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-92

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-93Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-89Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-91Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-91Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-91Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-91Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-91

Climate Control System ................................... 3-19Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-23Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-22

Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-26Coinholder(s) .................................................. 2-37Compact Disc Messages .......................... 3-51, 3-62Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-88Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-13Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5Coolant ......................................................... 3-33

Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-33Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-19

Cooling System .............................................. 5-32Cruise Control .................................................. 3-8Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-39Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-37Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12Customer Assistance Information ........................ 7-8

Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-8Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities ................................................ 7-6Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ............................................ 7-10

3

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Reporting Safety Defects to the United States

Government ............................................ 7-10Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11

DDaytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-13Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-21Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-31Disarming the System ..................................... 2-15Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-32Door ............................................................. 3-39

Ajar Light ................................................... 3-39Locks .......................................................... 2-7Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8

Driver ............................................................ 1-14Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-14Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3

Driving .......................................................... 4-15At Night ..................................................... 4-15City ........................................................... 4-19Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-2Freeway ..................................................... 4-20

Driving (cont.)Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-22In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-16Winter ........................................................ 4-24

Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-39Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-24Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-18Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-18Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-38

EElectrical System ............................................ 5-97

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-97Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-98Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-98Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-98Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-98

Emissions Inspection and MaintenancePrograms ................................................... 3-37

Engine .......................................................... 5-21Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-21Battery ....................................................... 5-44Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-34Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-19Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-33Coolant ...................................................... 5-27Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-25Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12

4

Engine (cont.)Exhaust ..................................................... 2-33Oil ............................................................. 5-16Overheating ................................................ 5-30Starting ...................................................... 2-18

Engine Compartment Fuse Block ..................... 5-100Engine Coolant Level Check ............................. 6-19Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing .................. 4-40Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-19Engine Oil Level Check ................................... 6-19Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-15Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-26Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-12

FFilter ............................................................. 5-21

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-21Finding a PTY Station ..................................... 3-55Finding a PTY Station (RDS and XM™) ............. 3-45Finding a Station .................................... 3-43, 3-53Finish Care .................................................... 5-93Finish Damage ............................................... 5-94Five-Speed .................................................... 2-23

Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-64Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-6Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-76Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-77Floor Mats ..................................................... 2-37Fluid ............................................................. 5-23

Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-23Manual Transaxle ........................................ 5-25Power Steering ........................................... 5-38Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-39

Fluid Level Check ........................................... 6-20FM Stereo ..................................................... 3-63Folding Seatback, Passenger ............................. 1-5Following Distance .......................................... 4-38Fuel ............................................................... 5-4

Additives ...................................................... 5-6California Fuel .............................................. 5-5Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6Gage ......................................................... 3-40Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5System Inspection ....................................... 6-24

Fuses ........................................................... 5-98Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-98Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-98

5

GGage ............................................................ 3-33

Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-33Fuel .......................................................... 3-40Speedometer .............................................. 3-27Tachometer ................................................. 3-28

Gasoline ......................................................... 5-4Octane ........................................................ 5-4Specifications ............................................... 5-5

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-37GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities .................................................... 7-6

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-4Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-6Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-98Headlamps .................................................... 5-52

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-52Front Turn Signal Lamps .............................. 5-54Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52

Headlamps On Reminder ................................. 3-13Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-22Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-22Hitches .......................................................... 4-37

Hood ............................................................ 5-10Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10Release ..................................................... 5-10

Hood Latch Operation Check ............................ 6-19Horn ............................................................... 3-5How the System Alarm is Activated ................... 2-15How to Add Coolant to the Coolant

Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-34How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-36How to Add Fluid .................................... 5-25, 5-26How to Check ................................ 5-23, 5-25, 5-68How to Check and Add Fluid ............................ 5-27How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-38How to Remove and Replace the Floor Mat ....... 2-38How to Use This Manual ...................................... iiHow to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-26Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-18

IIf No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-31If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-30If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-35If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-36If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-28If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ..................... 4-35If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ........................... 4-26Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-16

6

Ignition Transaxle Lock Check .......................... 6-22Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-29Inflation — Tire Pressure ................................. 5-67Inspection ...................................................... 6-25

Brake System ............................................. 6-25Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-25Exhaust System .......................................... 6-24Fuel System ............................................... 6-24Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-24Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle

Boot and Seal ......................................... 6-24Throttle System ........................................... 6-25

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-26Cluster ....................................................... 3-26Overview ..................................................... 3-2Storage Area .............................................. 2-37

Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-14Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............................ 5-99Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-14

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-45

KKey Lock Cylinders Service .............................. 6-21Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4

Keys ............................................................... 2-2

LLamps ........................................................... 3-12

Exterior ...................................................... 3-12Interior ....................................................... 3-14

Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................... 1-14, 1-23LATCH System ............................................... 1-39

Child Restraints ........................................... 1-39Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System ........................................ 1-41Leaving Your Vehicle ......................................... 2-9Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine

Running ..................................................... 2-29Liftgate/Liftglass ................................................ 2-9Liftgate/Liftglass Release .................................. 2-10Liftglass/Liftgate ................................................ 2-9Light ............................................................. 3-30

Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-30Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-32Brake System Warning ................................. 3-31Charging System ......................................... 3-31Cruise Control ............................................. 3-39Door Ajar ................................................... 3-39Low Washer Fluid Warning ........................... 3-39Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-34Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-38Overdrive Off .............................................. 3-39

7

Light (cont.)Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-28

Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-32Locks ............................................................. 2-7

Door ........................................................... 2-7Leaving Your Vehicle ..................................... 2-9Power Door .................................................. 2-8Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8

Long Trip/Highway Definition .............................. 6-6Long Trip/Highway Intervals ............................... 6-6Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ........ 6-14Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ....................... 3-39Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-38

MMaintenance, Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-103Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-19

At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-19At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-19At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-21At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-20Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-25Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-25Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-24Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-24How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3Introduction .................................................. 6-2Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ..... 6-14

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-19Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-24Part D - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ............................................... 6-26Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-28Selecting the Right Schedule .......................... 6-5Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ............. 6-7Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle

Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-24Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-25Using Your ................................................... 6-4Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-40Making Turns ................................................. 4-38Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-34Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2Manual Transaxle ............................................ 2-18

Fluid .......................................................... 5-25Operation ................................................... 2-23

Manual Windows ............................................ 2-11Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-6Mexico, Central America and Caribbean

Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands) – Customer Assistance ....... 7-5

Mirrors .......................................................... 2-35Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-35Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-36

8

Mirrors (cont.)Outside Remote Control Mirrors ..................... 2-36

MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4

NNavigation/Radio System .................................. 3-63New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-16Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-103

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-27Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12Oil ................................................................ 5-16

Engine ....................................................... 5-16Pressure Light ............................................. 3-38

Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-27Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4Operation ...................................................... 3-19Operation Tips ................................................ 3-22Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-4Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-22Outside ......................................................... 2-36

Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-36Remote Controls Mirrors ............................... 2-36

Overdrive Off ................................................. 2-22Overdrive Off Light .......................................... 3-39Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5

Owners, Canadian ............................................... iiOwner’s Information ........................................ 7-12

PPark (P) ........................................................ 2-30

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-28Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-30

Parking ......................................................... 2-27Brake ........................................................ 2-27Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-32

Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park (P)Mechanism Check ....................................... 6-23

Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-39Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-31Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-19Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-24Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-26Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-28Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-23Passing ................................................. 4-12, 4-38Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-8Playing a Compact Disc .......................... 3-50, 3-57Playing a Specific Loaded

Compact Disc ............................................. 3-59Playing the Radio ................................... 3-43, 3-52Power Steering ................................................ 4-9

9

Power ........................................................... 3-17Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-17Door Locks .................................................. 2-8Electrical System ......................................... 5-98Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ................. 3-18Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-38Windows .................................................... 2-12

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-26

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-13

RRadiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-29Radio Data System (RDS) ....................... 3-42, 3-55Radio Messages ............................................. 3-47Radios .......................................................... 3-41

Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-64Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-64Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-63Radio with CD ............................................ 3-42Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-52Setting the Time .......................................... 3-41Understanding Reception .............................. 3-63

RDS Messages ...................................... 3-46, 3-56

Reactivating the System .................................. 2-15Reading Lamp ................................................ 3-16Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ................. 2-40Rear Combination Lamps ................................. 5-56Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-7Rear Seat Passenger Positions ......................... 1-22Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-22Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-40Rear Window Defogger .................................... 3-21Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-35Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-3Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-30Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire .................................................. 5-80Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-78Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-59Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-44Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ..................................................... 1-57Reporting Safety Defects ................................. 7-10

Canadian Government .................................. 7-10General Motors ........................................... 7-11United States Government ............................ 7-10

Restraint System Check ................................... 6-20Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-56Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash .................................................. 1-57

10

Restraint Systems ........................................... 1-56Checking .................................................... 1-56Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-57

Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-22Roadside ......................................................... 7-6

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-28Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-34

SSafety Belt ..................................................... 1-26

Pretensioners .............................................. 1-26Reminder Light ............................................ 3-28

Safety Belts ................................................... 5-92Care of ...................................................... 5-92Driver Position ............................................ 1-14How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-14Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-13Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-22Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-22Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-26Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-21Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-8

Safety Chains ................................................. 4-37Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiSeat Operation Check ..................................... 6-21Seatback, Folding Passenger ............................. 1-5

Seats .............................................................. 1-3Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5Manual ........................................................ 1-2Passenger Folding Seatback ........................... 1-5Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-7Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-3

Securing a Child Restraint ................................ 1-41Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-41Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-42Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-44

Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6Selecting the Right Schedule, Maintenance .......... 6-5Service ........................................................... 5-3

Adding Equipment to the Outside of YourVehicle ..................................................... 5-4

Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-34Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11

Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-12Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) ............... 3-46, 3-56Setting Preset Stations ............................ 3-44, 3-53Setting the Time ............................................. 3-41Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .................. 3-44, 3-54Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-94Shift Speeds .................................................. 2-26Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-28

11

Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-30Short Trip/City Definition .................................... 6-5Short Trip/City Intervals ..................................... 6-5Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ................ 6-7Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-16Six-Speed ...................................................... 2-24Skidding ........................................................ 4-14Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-18Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-90Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-101Speedometer .................................................. 3-27Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-21Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-18Steering .......................................................... 4-9Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-11Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot

and Seal Inspection ..................................... 6-24Steering Tips .................................................. 4-10Storage Areas ................................................ 2-37

Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-37Coinholder(s) .............................................. 2-37Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-37Glove Box .................................................. 2-37Instrument Panel Storage Area ...................... 2-37Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-38Rear Cargo Accessory Track System .............. 2-40Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-40

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools .......................... 5-85Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ....................... 5-87Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-28

Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-13Sunroof ......................................................... 2-42Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ............... 1-47

How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-53Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-56What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-53What Will You See After an Air

Bag Inflates? ........................................... 1-54When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-52Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-50

TTachometer .................................................... 3-28Temperature Display ........................................ 3-28Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-14Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-13

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-13Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-25Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-5Tire Inflation Check ......................................... 6-19Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-62Tire Size ....................................................... 5-64Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-65Tires ..................................................... 5-61, 5-94

Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-71Chains ....................................................... 5-75Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-77Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-88

12

Tires (cont.)If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-76Inflation — Tire Pressure .............................. 5-67Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-68Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-72Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-73Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-74When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-70

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-19Top Strap ...................................................... 1-36Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-38Torque Lock ................................................... 2-30Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-36Towing .......................................................... 4-30

Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-30Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-34Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-30

Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-37Transaxle ....................................................... 5-23

Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-23Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-25

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-20Transaxle Operation, Manual ............................ 2-23Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) .................. 5-51Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit

Repair Manual ............................................ 7-11Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8Trip Odometers .............................................. 3-27Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-5

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-39

UUnderbody Flushing Service ............................. 6-23Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-63Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-72United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-75Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-90Using Song List Mode ..................................... 3-61Using the Recovery Hook ................................ 4-29

VVehicle ............................................................ 4-5

Control ........................................................ 4-5Damage Warnings ........................................... ivLoading ...................................................... 4-32Parking Your ............................................... 2-31Symbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle Identification ........................................ 5-97Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-97Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-97

Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-44Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-22Visor Vanity Mirror .......................................... 2-13Visors ........................................................... 2-13

13

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-25Warnings ......................................................... 3-4

Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-4Safety and Symbols ......................................... iiiVehicle Damage .............................................. iv

Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ...................... 3-39Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-92Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-20Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-36Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-35What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-18What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-21What to Use .................................. 5-28, 5-38, 5-39Wheels .......................................................... 5-73

Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-73Replacement ............................................... 5-74

When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-17When to Change Engine Oil ............................. 5-20When to Check ...................................... 5-25, 5-68When to Check and Change ............................ 5-23When to Check and What to Use ..................... 5-27When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-38When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking

on a Hill ..................................................... 4-40

Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-36Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-10Windows ....................................................... 2-11

Manual ...................................................... 2-11Power ........................................................ 2-12

Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades ........... 5-93Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-8

Fluid .......................................................... 5-39Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................ 6-19Windshield Wiper ............................................ 5-60

Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-60Fuses ........................................................ 5-98

Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-7Winter Driving ................................................ 4-24Wiper Blade Check ......................................... 6-20

XXM™ Radio Satellite Service (USA Only) ........... 3-42XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-64XM™ Satellite Radio Service (USA Only) ........... 3-64

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

14